Text

2013 Braidwood Station Initial License Examination Administered Simulator JPMs
	ML13169A426
Person / Time
Site:	Braidwood
Issue date:	04/15/2013
From:	; Division of Reactor Safety III
To:	; Exelon Generation Co
	Zoia, C.
Shared Package
ML11354A330	List: ML13169A418; ML13169A419; ML13169A421; ML13169A422; ML13169A424; ML13169A426;
References
	Download: ML13169A426 (350)
	v • d • e

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.

2. Unit 1 is at 100% power.

3. Maintenance was performed last shift to repair shutdown bank C rod control.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, Unit One Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance, for shutdown bank C rods.

2. All Prerequisites Precautions, Limitations & Actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 have been met.

3. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms as necessary.

4. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor when you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods.

SIM-102 Page 1 of 6

TASK TITLE: Perform Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance JPM No.: SIM-102 Rev: 2013 NRC Task No.: R-RD-004 K&A No.: 00100A4.03 Objective: 4.C.GP-04 K&A IMP: 4.0/3.7 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 30 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES QUARTERLY SURVEILLANCE, Rev 23.

MATERIALS:

1. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES QUARTERLY SURVEILLANCE, Rev 23.

TASK STANDARDS:

1. Perform rod movement verification of shutdown bank C rods.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.

2. Unit 1 is at 100% power.

3. Maintenance was performed last shift to repair shutdown bank C rod control.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, Unit One Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance, for shutdown bank C rods.

CUE: Hand examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2.

2. All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations & Actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 have been met.

3. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms as necessary.

4. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor when you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods.

SIM-102 Page 2 of 6

RECORD START TIME:

NOTE: As examiner, role play peer check and concur with any recommendations from the examinee.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE

1. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2. SAT UNSAT N/A

VERIFY all applicable

VERIFY all applicable Comments:

Prerequisites, Precautions, Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions and Limitations and are satisfactorily addressed Actions are satisfactorily (step F.2.1). addressed.

CUE: All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.

2. Transfer Rod Control to Manual Perform the following at SAT UNSAT N/A and Verify Tave is matched to Tref 1PM05J: Comments:

(step F.2.2).

Place the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.

Verify Tave matched to Tref.

3. Select Shutdown Bank C with SAT UNSAT N/A Rod Bank Select Switch.

Place rod bank select Comments:

switch in SBC.

4. Record initial rod data. Record initial group step SAT UNSAT N/A counter readings (ARO park Comments:

228) and DRPI readings (228) for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2).

5. Insert SBC one step Place rod motion control SAT UNSAT N/A CUE: As Unit Supervisor, switch to in and insert SBC to Comments:

acknowledge reports of (ARO park 228 -1 = 227) annunciators due to rod motion steps on group step counter.

as they occur (for 1-10-A7 ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT provide cue that the SER point 2153 Computer Rod Deviation Sequence is printed).

(Failure: if examinee moves any other bank)

6. Withdraw SBC to step 231

Place rod motion control SAT UNSAT N/A switch to out and withdraw Comments:

SBC to 231 steps on group Informational Note: 1BwGP step counter.

100-8 p. 34 limits outward rod motion to 3 continuous steps at o Verify DRPI indicates a time. >222.

SIM-102 Page 3 of 6

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE

7 Insert SBC 10-15 steps

Place rod motion control SAT UNSAT N/A switch to in and insert SBC Comments:

10-15 steps as indicated (Failure criteria: DRPI 210 light lit) on the group step counter (far enough to cause a DRPI change of > 10 steps).

o Record the group step counter reading and the DRPI readings for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2).

o Verify each rod in SBC indicates movement > 10 steps and record by checking the appropriate box.

8 Withdraw SBC to original

Place rod motion control SAT UNSAT N/A position switch to out and withdraw Comments:

SBC to ARO park 228 steps on group step counter.

o Record the final group step counter reading (ARO park 228) and DRPI readings (228) for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2).

o Verify SBC DRPI > 222 steps.

o Verify that all rods of SBC are at the initial position recorded on Table 1 (Page D-2).

Note: If asked, COLR limit is > o Verify the SBC is within the 224 steps. limits specified in the COLR.

o Complete Table 1 for the CUE: It examinee checks table SBC within the insertion 4-1 in curve book, inform limits of the COLR by examinee that the park checking the appropriate position is 228 steps in box.

table 4-1.

SIM-102 Page 4 of 6

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE

9. Rod Control Restoration. (step Restore Rod Control as SAT UNSAT N/A F.4). follows: Comments:

CUE: If asked, the Bank Overlap Counter has not

Verify controlling Control changed since Bank is in its original commencing this position.

surveillance.

Place the Rod Bank Select NOTE: If examinee desires to Switch to MANUAL.

N/A step F.4.1, give concurrence to do so.

Verify Low Power Interlock C-5 NOT LIT.

NOTE: If asked to perform independent

Obtain Independent verifications in the Verification of C-5 NOT following steps, provide LIT.

the following cue as

Verify Tave/Tref deviation asked: < 1 °F.

CUE: Verification has been

Verify the following provided. Annunciators are clear:

NOTE: If asked for desired

1-10-A6, ROD BANK alignment of rod control LO-2 INSERTION systems, provide the LIMIT.

following cue:

1-10-A7, ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT.

1-10-B6, ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT.

Obtain Independent Verification that the above annunciators are clear.

CUE: Unit Supervisor desires

Place the Rod Bank Select automatic rod control. Switch to AUTO.

Obtain Independent Verification of Rod Bank Select Switch in AUTO.

Verify all required RD CUE: All ductwork has been cabinet ductwork has been reinstalled. reinstalled.

10. Acknowledge completion of Inform the Unit 1 Unit surveillance, and terminate the Supervisor that you have JPM. completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME:

COMMENTS:

SIM-102 Page 5 of 6

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS

Verify/perform TQ-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.

Establish the conditions of IC 21, 100% power, steady state, equilibrium xenon.

Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist.

Place simulator in RUN.

Verify CBD at 220 steps.

Record ARO park position in body JPM where ARO park ___ designated (see JPM steps 4, 5, 8) IF NOT ALREADY FILLED IN FOR THE JPM.

COMMENTS

Provide examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES SURVEILLANCE.

(Final)

SIM-102 Page 6 of 6

WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID-WEST SITES ONLY)

Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2____

PMID/RQ: ______123456____ Work Order #: __ N/A____________

PMID/RQ

Title:

MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLY SURVIELLANCE ________

PMID/RQ Due Date: ___ N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review: Name Date Time Shift Authorization to Start Work: ___Joe Supervisor ______ Today 5 min ago Work Started __________________________ ________ ________

Work Stopped: __________________________ ________ ________

Supv Review of Work Completion: __________________________ ________ ________

ANI Review of work package: __________________________ ________ ________

Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO (Work Started date (above shall be the credit date unless otherwise explained)

Complete one of the following:

Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# _______

Below: If crediting per another WO, verify credit date is Work Started date of referenced WO.

_________ Complete Sat - Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat - Credit Surveillance No Work Performed - Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)

No Work Performed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)

Comments (partial surveillance) PMT for Shutdown Bank C ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)

Title Signature Date

WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61

PROCEDURE NO.

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 UNIT NO. REVISION NO.

1 23 BRAIDWOOD STATION PROCEDURE TITLE:

UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES SURVEILLANCE Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 23 Remove EC 368959 requirements from procedure (EC PCRA 1230957-30 was closed but procedure revisions never reflected the removal of the EC.)

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES SURVEILLANCE A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure outlines the steps necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of each Movable Control Assembly by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction and is applicable in MODES 1 and 2. This procedure SHALL be performed either:

1. As scheduled,

2. Non-routinely in conjunction with a Reactor Startup or Rod Malfunction or,

3. To align the rods to a new ARO park position as determined by Reactor Engineering.

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Spec LCOs:

a. 3.1.4.

b. 3.1.5.

c. 3.1.6.

2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: 3.1.4.2.

3. Station Procedures:

a. 1BwGP 100-2, Reactor Startup

b. 1BwGP 100-8, Generic Reactor Control Guidance

c. 1BwOL 3.1.4, LCOAR - Reactivity Control Systems - Movable Control Assemblies - Group Height 1

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use C. PREREQUISITES

1. Receive permission to perform this surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover Sheet signed and dated.

NOTE The following Prerequisite may require MMD support to remove and re-install interfering ductwork at the RD Power Supply Cabinets.

2. A visual inspection inside of all 5 RD power cabinets has been performed ensuring no blown fuse indicators tripped (reference Attachment D for blown fuse illustration).

3. The Reactor is operating in steady state conditions, if this surveillance is being performed with the Unit in Mode 1.

4. BwCB-1 Table 4-1 has been revised to indicate the ARO park position, if necessary.

5. A visual inspection outside of all 5 RD power cabinets indicates that one GROUP SELECT light is LIT per cabinet.

6. Prior to initiating rod motion, refer to the Rod Control Operation section of 1BwGP 100-8.

2

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use D. PRECAUTIONS NOTE All of the following precautions are only applicable for performance of Subsection 2.0.

1. Prior to transferring Rod Control to the automatic MODE, VERIFY:

a. Permissive C-5 is extinguished.

b. VERIFY Tave/Tref deviation 1°F.

2. Avoid variations in plant load, Reactor Coolant temperature, and Boron concentration.

3. DO NOT allow Tave changes of greater than -4°F or +1°F. Compensate by intermittent rod movement to match Tave/Tref.

4. If any control rod group (except Control Bank D) is withdrawn past 231 steps, STOP the surveillance. PERFORM Attachment A, Rod Bank Realignment to return the affected bank to the ARO position and resume testing of the remaining rods as required. If Control Bank D is withdrawn past 231, STOP the surveillance. PERFORM Attachment A, Rod Bank Realignment, to return Control Bank D to initial position.

3

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. As stated in Tech Spec LCOs 3.1.4, 3.1.5 and 3.1.6.

2. If the Acceptance Criteria (¢) is not met during the performance of this surveillance, IMMEDIATELY notify the Shift Manager or designee to initiate LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4 if in MODES 1 or 2.

3. Each Rod Bank tested must be returned to the rod insertion limits specified in the COLR (for Shutdown Rods) and to its original or new ARO park position (for Control Rods) to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 and 3.1.6 are not exceeded prior to proceeding to the next Rod Bank (N/A if performing Subsection 1.0).

4. Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-12-C1, PZR PRESS CONT DEV LOW HTRS ON, may alarm during movement of the Control Banks.

5. Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" may alarm during movement of the Shutdown Banks or Control Banks.

6. It is permissible to place DRPI in Half Accuracy MODE, as required, if data failures prohibit performing this surveillance. Prior to placing DRPI in Half Accuracy, an evaluation shall be performed to verify loss of both A & B Channels to individual rods will not occur. (Sections 1.0 and 2.0 only)

7. Annunciator 1-10-A7, SER point 2153, should be considered inoperable during the performance of Section 3.0. If this section can not be completed, the computer points reset and the alarm cleared within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months , then 1BwOS RD-2 should be completed within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months of the alarm condition.

8. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.

4

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. MAIN BODY NOTE Initial each step in the space provided adjacent to the procedure step number AFTER the step has been successfully completed.

Person(s) performing VERIFICATIONS SHALL initial in the space provided following the step.

0.0 SURVEILLANCE OVERVIEW 0.1 Parallel Subsections 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 are independent of one another so that either Subsection may be performed.

0.2 Performance of either Subsection 1.0, or 2.0 fully satisfies the surveillance requirement.

0.3 Performance of the steps in either Subsections 1.0 or 2.0 for less than all Movable Control Assemblies is acceptable if a partial surveillance is required.

The Shift Manager or designee SHALL determine the steps to be performed.

The Data Package Cover Sheet must indicate that a partial surveillance was performed, which rod(s) were exercised, and the reason(s) why stated in the comments section.

0.4 Subsection 3.0 will establish a new ARO park position. This subsection may be performed after the rods have been exercised in Subsection 2.0 or independently to establish a new ARO park position. Performance of this Subsection is optional.

5

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 0.5 The Subsections perform the following:

F.1.0 Takes credit for the movement of the Shutdown and Control Banks during a Reactor Startup.

F.2.0 Actually moves the Shutdown and Control Banks when the UNIT is at power and restores the rods to their original position.

F.3.0 Established a new ARO park position.

F.4.0 Restores rod control and must always be performed after Subsections F.2.0 or F.3.0.

START Rod Movement Verification During 1.0 Startup Rod Movement Establishes a new ARO Verification 2.0 3.0 Park Position During Operation 4.0 Restoration END 6

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 1.0 ROD MOVEMENT VERIFICATION DURING STARTUP

_____ 1.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

¢ ____ 1.2 During the withdrawal of the Shutdown Banks as directed in 1BwGP 100-2, VERIFY each rod moved at least 10 steps.

¢ ____ 1.3 During the withdrawal of the Control Banks as directed in 1BwGP 100-2, VERIFY each rod moved at least 10 steps.

NOTE The following step may be marked N/A at the discretion of the SM/Designee if the RD cabinet ductwork is required to remain removed for additional surveillances of other RD work.

_____ 1.4 VERIFY all required RD cabinet ductwork has been re-installed.

7

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.0 ROD MOVEMENT VERIFICATION DURING OPERATION

_____ 2.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

2.2 VERIFY/TRANSFER rod control to MANUAL and ESTABLISH Tave/Tref match:

_____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.

_____ b. MAINTAIN Tave matched with Tref.

NOTE As long as the Shutdown Bank is above 224 steps, as indicated by the bank demand step counters and verified by DRPI, indicating 222 steps, the rod insertion limits are met as specified in the COLR.

Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.

2.3 PERFORM the rod movement verification for the Shutdown Rods as follows:

NOTE The Bank order of the Shutdown Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Shutdown Bank E, D, C, B, A.

Shutdown Bank E

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank E on the Rod Bank Select.

2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.

3) INSERT Shutdown Bank E one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 Shutdown Bank E. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank E to 231 steps on the Group Step Counter.

8

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.3 5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank E on Table 1.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Shutdown Bank E 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank E indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank E to the initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank E DRPI reading 222 steps.

NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank E are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.

14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank E is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank E.

9

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank D

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.

3) INSERT Shutdown Bank D one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank D. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank D to 231 steps on the Group Step Counter.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank D on Table 1.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Shutdown Bank D 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank D indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank D to the initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank D DRPI reading 222 steps.

10

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank D are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.

14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank D is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank D.

11

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank C

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.

3) INSERT Shutdown Bank C one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank C. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank C to 231 steps on the Group Step Counter.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank C on Table 1.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Shutdown Bank C 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank C indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank C to the initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank C DRPI reading 222 steps.

12

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank C are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.

14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank C is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank C.

13

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank B

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.

3) INSERT Shutdown Bank B one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank B. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank B to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank B on Table 1.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Shutdown Bank B 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank B indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank B to the initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank B DRPI reading 222 steps.

14

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank B are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.

14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank B is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank B.

15

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank A

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.

3) INSERT Shutdown Bank A one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank A. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank A to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank A on Table 1.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Shutdown Bank A 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank A indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank A to the initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank A DRPI reading 222 steps.

16

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank A are at the initial position recorded TABLE 1.

14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank A is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank A.

17

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 PERFORM the rod movement verification for the Control Rods as follows:

NOTE The Control Banks may be moved in or out at the discretion of the Shift Manager or Designee to meet the requirements of this surveillance. Monitor Tave and Rx Power closely and correct as needed to minimize plant transients.

NOTE If a Control Bank is fully inserted, RECORD only the Group 1 & 2 Initial Step Counter readings and MARK any other columns on the Data Table for the fully inserted Control Bank "N/A". DO NOT perform the rod exercise for that Bank. The surveillance is still considered "Complete" as Tech Specs require testing only those rods NOT fully inserted in the core.

NOTE The Bank order of the Control Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Control Bank A, B, C, D to facilitate final Tave adjustment.

NOTE Based on the RIL figure in the COLR the sequence, overlap, and rod insertion limits are satisfied as long as the Control Bank is above 224 steps as indicated by the bank demand step counters and verified by DRPI. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.

Control Bank A

1) SELECT Control Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.

18

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use NOTE Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/- 12 steps.

F. 2.4 3) INSERT Control Bank A one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank A. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank A to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

19

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 7) INSERT Control Bank A 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank A indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Control Bank A to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.

12) VERIFY Control Bank A DRPI reading 222 steps.

NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank A are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.

20

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 14) PERFORM the following:

a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR:

1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):

(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).

(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank A.

21

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 Control Bank B

1) SELECT Control Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.

NOTE Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/- 12 steps.

3) INSERT Control Bank B one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank B. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank B to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Control Bank B 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank B indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

22

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank B to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.

12) VERIFY Control Bank B DRPI reading 222 steps.

NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank B are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.

14) PERFORM the following:

a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR:

1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):

(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).

(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank B.

23

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 Control Bank C

1) SELECT Control Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.

NOTE Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/- 12 steps.

3) INSERT Control Bank C one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank C. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank C to 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

5) RECORD the withdrawn to 231 Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Control Bank C 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank C indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

24

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank C to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.

12) VERIFY Control Bank C DRPI reading 222 steps.

NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank C are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.

14) PERFORM the following:

a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR:

1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):

(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).

(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank C.

25

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 2.4 Control Bank D

1) SELECT Control Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.

NOTE Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within +/- 12 steps.

3) INSERT Control Bank D one step from the initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank D. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

NOTE Control Bank D should NOT be withdrawn past 231 steps. It is desired to withdraw Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps, if possible.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps, not to exceed 231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

a) RECORD the target CBD position _________ for withdrawal.

b) WITHDRAW Control Bank D to the target value.

5) RECORD the withdrawn Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.

6) INSERT Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

7) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.

26

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use

¢ F. 2.4 8) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank D indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

9) WITHDRAW Control Bank D to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

10) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.

NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

11) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank D are at the initial position recorded on TABLE 2.

12) PERFORM the following:

a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR:

1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT" b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):

(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).

(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

13) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank D.

27

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.0 ESTABLISHING NEW ARO PARK POSITION

_____ 3.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

3.2 VERIFY/TRANSFER rod control to MANUAL and ESTABLISH Average Tave/Tref within +/- 1°F:

_____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.

_____ b. ESTABLISH Tave within +/- 1°F of Tref using control rods, as needed.

_____ c. RECORD the new ARO park position from BwCB-1, Table 4-1 or Reactor Engineering _______________ steps.

3.3 PERFORM the following to establish the ARO park position for the Shutdown Rods:

NOTE Annunciator 1-10-A7, ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT, may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE The Bank order of the Shutdown Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Shutdown Bank E, D, C, B, A.

Shutdown Bank E:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank E on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 3.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank E one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank E.

28

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.3 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank E to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 3.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank E are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank E.

Shutdown Bank D:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 3.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank D one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded per TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank D to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 3.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank D are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank D.

29

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.3 Shutdown Bank C:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 3.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank C one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank C to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 3.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank C are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank C.

Shutdown Bank B:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 3.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank B one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank B to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counters.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 3.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank B are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank B.

30

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.3 Shutdown Bank A:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 3.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Shutdown Bank A one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank A to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counters.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 3.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Shutdown Bank A are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank A.

31

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.4 PERFORM the following to establish the new ARO park position for the Control Rods:

NOTE The Bank order to establish the ARO park position should be Control Bank A, B, and then C (if at the ARO position).

Control Bank A

1) SELECT Control Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 4.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank A one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.

4) MOVE Control Bank A to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1.

5) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 4.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control Bank A are at the ARO position.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank A.

32

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.4 Control Bank B

1) SELECT Control Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 4.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank B one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.

4) MOVE Control Bank B to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1.

5) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 4.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control Bank B are at the ARO position.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank B.

33

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 3.4 Control Bank C

1) SELECT Control Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 4.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank C one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.

4) MOVE Control Bank C to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1.

5) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 4.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicated 222 steps withdrawn.

7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control Bank C are at the ARO position.

8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank C.

_____ 3.5 VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch in MANUAL.

_____ 3.6 PERFORM Attachment B, Thumbwheel Switch Setting and Checkout for the new ARO park position:

_____ 3.7 NOTIFY Site IT to ADJUST the computer points as required for the new ARO position.

34

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F. 4.0 ROD CONTROL RESTORATION NOTE The following step is performed to ensure that the Bank Overlap Unit reflects the proper control bank position. If the controlling bank cannot be restored to its original position due to plant conditions, then RESET the Bank Overlap Unit to match the present controlling bank position prior to continuing with step 4.1

_____ 4.1 VERIFY the controlling Control Bank has been returned to its original position, using any of the following methods (N/A if rods cannot be restored due to plant conditions):

Tave within +/- 1°F of Tref , no adjustment required.

Boration.

Dilution.

Turbine load changes.

_____ 4.2 VERIFY/PLACE Rod Bank Select switch to the MANUAL position.

_____ 4.3 VERIFY Low Power Interlock C-5 NOT LIT.

VERIFICATION _____

_____ 4.4. VERIFY Tave/Tref deviation 1°F, if returning Rod Bank Select switch to AUTO.

4.5 VERIFY the following annunciators are CLEAR:

_____ a. 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT".

VERIFICATION _____

_____ b. 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT".

VERIFICATION _____

_____ c. 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT".

VERIFICATION _____

35

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use F ____ 4.6 VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the AUTO or MANUAL position as directed by Shift Manager or designee based on plant conditions.

AUTO/MANUAL VERIFICATION _____

NOTE The following step may be marked N/A at the discretion of the SM/Designee if the RD cabinet ductwork is required to remain removed for additional surveillances of other RD work.

_____ 4.7 VERIFY all required RD cabinet ductwork has been reinstalled.

G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

1. For a complete surveillance, all Rods required to be tested have been determined OPERABLE by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction.

2. For a partial surveillance, each Rod tested has been determined OPERABLE by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction.

36

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A ROD BANK REALIGNMENT NOTE The following steps are to be used in the event a group of control rods is withdrawn past 231 steps. If the affected rod is in Shutdown Banks C, D, or E, GO TO Step 10.

1. RECORD the following information:

Affected Bank: ________________________

Group 1 step counter reading: ________________________

Group 2 step counter reading: ________________________

2. RECORD the As Found condition of the Master Cycler (Card A 105 1RD07J):

DS1 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)

DS2 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)

DS3 light status: ON/OFF (circle status) 37

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (cont.)

ROD BANK REALIGNMENT NOTE DS 1 and DS 2 light status is irrelevant in the following step. DS 3 light lit is sufficient to VERIFY Master Cycler Status.

3. PERFORM either of the following:

VERIFY the Master Cycler is set for Group 2 to move inward next.

DS 3 light LIT on Card A 105 at 1RD07J ADJUST the Master Cycler using the MC+1 pushbutton so that Group 2 will move inward next.

DS 3 light LIT on Card A 105 at 1RD07J

4. RECORD the As Left condition of the Master Cycler:

DS1 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)

DS2 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)

DS3 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)

5. SET both group step counters for the affected Bank to 231 steps.

6. RECORD the following information:

Affected Bank: ______________________

Group 1 step counter reading: ______________________ steps Group 2 step counter reading: ______________________ steps 38

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (cont.)

ROD BANK REALIGNMENT

7. VERIFY/ADJUST the affected bank computer point to match the affected bank step counters:

Step Counter on Rod Bank Computer Point 1PM05J Grp 1 ______________

CONT A U0049 _______________

Grp 2 ______________

Grp 1 ______________

CONT B U0050 _______________

Grp 2 ______________

Grp 1 ______________

CONT C U0051 _______________

Grp 2 ______________

Grp 1 ______________

CONT D U0052 _______________

Grp 2 ______________

Grp 1 ______________

SHUTDOWN A U0053 _______________

Grp 2 ______________

Grp 1 ______________

SHUTDOWN B U0054 _______________

Grp 2 ______________

39

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (cont.)

ROD BANK REALIGNMENT

8. PERFORM the following:

a. MANUALLY insert the affected bank to 228 steps.

b. VERIFY Group 2 of the affected bank inserts before Group 1.

c. MAUALLY INSERT/WITHDRAW the affected bank to the ARO position (BwCB-1 Table 4-1)

9. IF the affected group was in a control bank, PERFORM the following at 1RD08J:

a. PLACE the P/A Display switch to the affected bank position.

b. IF required, ADJUST the setting for the affected bank to actual rod position:

1) HOLD the MANUAL/AUTO switch in the MANUAL position.

2) MOMENTARILY DEPRESS the UP/DOWN pushbutton to match the actual position of the affected bank.

3) RELEASE the MANUAL/AUTO switch.

4) RETURN to Main Body step in effect.

40

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (cont.)

ROD BANK REALIGNMENT NOTE The following steps are used to align Shutdown Banks C, D, or E only.

10. RECORD the following As Found information:

Affected Bank: ______________________

Step counter reading: ______________________ steps

11. VERIFY the affected bank step counter greater than 231 steps.

12. SET the step counter to 231 steps for the affected bank.

13. MANUALLY insert the affected bank to 228 steps.

14. VERIFY proper operation of the affected bank.

15. MANUALLY INSERT/WITHDRAW the affected bank to the ARO position (BwCB-1 Table 4-1).

16. RECORD the following As Left information:

Affected Bank: ______________________

Step counter reading: ______________________ steps

17. RETURN to Main Body step in effect.

41

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT This section sets the thumbwheel switches to the desired full out axial park position.

This section also verifies the correct setting of these switches by simulation Bank Overlap.

1. The REM or designee will RECORD the desired full out axial park position of the control rods and the desired As Left thumbwheel switch settings below. See Attachment C as a guide for required switch settings.

Full out axial park position: _________ steps.

S1- _______ S2- _______ S3- _______ S4- _______ S5- _______ S6- _______

________/________

Initial Date

2. RECORD the As Found thumbwheel switch settings for the Bank Overlap in 1RD07J.

S1- _______ S2- _______ S3- _______ S4- _______ S5- _______ S6- _______

________/________

Initial Date

3. SELECT/ENSURE the Bank Selector Switch is in MANUAL (to allow Bank Overlap to function).

________/________

Initial Date CAUTION The thumbwheel switches are designed for best operation by rotating the switches down.

4 CYCLE the thumbwheel switches S1 through S6 through complete rotation.

This should include the units, tens, and hundreds positions for all switches.

________/________

Initial Date 42

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B (cont.)

THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT

5. SET the thumbwheel switches S1 through S6 to the positions listed in step 1.

________/________

Initial Date

6. RECORD the As Found value of Bank Overlap step counter in Logic Cabinet.

AS FOUND ______________

________/________

Initial Date

7. RESET the Step Counter in the Logic Cabinet by DEPRESSING the reset button on the Bank Overlap Panel.

________/________

Initial Date

a. OBSERVE the step position indication resets to '000'.

________/________

Initial Date NOTE Steps 8 and 9 are performed simultaneously.

8. Using the "+1 Step" pushbutton in the Logic Cabinet, SIMULATE the rods being stepped out by DEPRESSING the "+1 Step" pushbutton as needed.

________/________

Initial Date 43

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B (cont.)

THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT

9. OBSERVE the indications of proper bank start and step positions. This may be done by observing DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4 indicators on the Bank Overlap Decoder card A206 in the Logic Cabinet

a. The control bank select lights on the Bank Overlap Display (BOD) card (A206 in 1RD07J show proper selection.

0 BOU < S1 DS1 only S1 BOU < S2 DS1 and DS2 S2 BOU < S3 DS2 only S3 BOU < S4 DS2 and DS3 S4 BOU < S5 DS3 only S5 BOU < S6 DS3 and DS4 S6 BOU DS4 only

________/________

Initial Date

10. RETURN the step counter in the Logic Cabinet to its As Found value from step 6 using the +1 step push button.

AS FOUND ___________ AS LEFT ___________

________/________

Initial Date 44

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT C ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE 225 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2 - 225 S3 - 230 S4 - 340 S5 - 345 S6 - 455 (Bank Overlap - 110 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps) 226 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2 - 226 S3 - 230 S4 - 341 S5 - 345 S6 - 456 (Bank Overlap - 111 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps) 227 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2 - 227 S3 - 230 S4 - 342 S5 - 345 S6 - 457 (Bank Overlap - 112 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps) 228 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2 - 228 S3 - 230 S4 - 343 S5 - 345 S6 - 458 (Bank Overlap - 113 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps) 229 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 115 S2 - 229 S3 - 230 S4 - 344 S5 - 345 S6 - 459 (Bank Overlap - 114 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps) 45

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT C (cont.)

ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE Directions and Formulas for calculating Bank Overlap unit Switch Settings:

1. Obtain the desired Bank Separation and Bank Overlap values from Reactivity/Nuclear Engineering, as supported in the applicable COLR.

2. Bank Separation must be at least one greater than Bank Overlap; these values may never be equal.

3. Bank Separation must be at least (Full out axial park position)/2+1).

4. S1 (CBB start) = Bank Separation value.

5. S2 (CBA stop) = S1 + Bank Overlap value = Full out axial park position.

6. S3 (CBC start) = 2(S1).

7. S4 (CBB stop) = S1 + S2.

8. S5 (CBD start) = 3(S1)

9. S6 (CBC stop) = S1 + S4 46

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT C (cont.)

ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE 231 Step Full Out Axial Park Position S1 - 116 S2 - 231 S3 - 232 S4 - 347 S5 - 348 S6 - 463 (Bank Overlap - 115 steps Bank Separation - 116 steps)

Thumbwheel Switch Setting/Function CBA CBB CBC CBD

-- - 000 Start CBA Out 0 0 0 0 S1 - 116 Start CBB Out 116 0 0 0 S2 - 231 Stop CBA Out 231 115 0 0 S3 - 232 Start CBC Out 231 116 0 0 WITHDRAW S4 - 347 Stop CBB Out 231 231 115 0 S5 - 348 Start CBD Out 231 231 116 0 S6 - 463 Stop CBC Out 231 231 231 115

-- - 464 Moving CBD 116 steps 231 231 231 116 S6 - 463 Start CBC In 231 231 231 115 S5 - 348 Stop CBD In 231 231 116 0 S4 - 347 Start CBB In 231 231 115 0 S3 - 232 Stop CBC In 231 116 0 0 INSERT S2 - 231 Start CBA In 231 115 0 0 S1 - 116 Stop CBB In 116 0 0 0

-- - 000 Stop CBA at 0 steps 0 0 0 0 47

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT D Blown Fuse Illustration Blown Fuse Indicator pictured on the left provides an indication of a blown fuse (indicator is extended).

Blown Fuse Indicator pictured on the right provides a normal view (indicator is not extended, fuse is not blown).

(Final) 48

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use TABLE 1 - SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS ROD Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position BANK Steps ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER H4 D8 ________ ________ ________ ________

S/D H12 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E M8 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ## Y N Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position Steps ROD ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP BANK STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER C5 E13 _____ _____ _____ _____

S/D N11 D-1 D-1 D-1 D-1 D L3 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ## Y N Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position Steps ROD ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP BANK STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER E3 C11 _____ _____ _____ _____

S/D L13 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 C N5 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ## Y N ROD Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position BANK Steps ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER G3 C9 _____ _____ _____ _____

J13 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 N7 S/D C7 B G13 _____ _____ _____ _____

N9 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 J3 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ## Y N

1. "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

D-2

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use TABLE 1 - SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS (Cont.)

ROD Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position BANK Steps ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER D2 B12 _____ _____ ______ _____

M14 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 P4 S/D B4 A D14 _____ _____ _____ _____

P12 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 M2 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ## Y N

1. "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

D-3

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use TABLE 2 - CONTROL ROD BANKS Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position Steps ROD ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP BANK STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER H6 ________ ________ ________ ________

H10 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 F8 ________ ________ ________ ________

K8 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 CONT A EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION? ** ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1-10-A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR? Y N Or corrective action taken? N/A Y N Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position Steps ROD ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP BANK STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER F2 B10 _____ _____ _____ _____

K14 B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1 P6 B6 F14 _____ _____ _____ _____

CONT B P10 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 K2 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION? ** ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1-10-A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR? Y N Or corrective action taken? N/A Y N Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position Steps ROD ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP BANK STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER H2 B8 _____ _____ ______ _____

H14 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 P8 F6 F10 _____ _____ _____ _____

CONT C K10 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 K6 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION? ** ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1-10-A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR? Y N Or corrective action taken? N/A Y N

1. "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

- Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.

D-4

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use TABLE 2 - CONTROL ROD BANKS (Cont.)

Inserted DRPI > 10 Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Final Position Steps ROD ROD NO. GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP BANK STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI STEP DRPI COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER D4 M12 D-1 D-1 D-1 D-1 D12 M4 _____ _____ _____ _____

CONT D H8 D-2 D-2 D-2 D-2 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? ¢Y N RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION? ## Y N ANNUNCIATORS 1-10-A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR? Y N Or corrective action taken? N/A Y N

1. "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

- Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.

COMMENTS:

D-5

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use TABLE 3 - SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS INITIAL POSITION FINAL POSITION ROD BANK ROD NO.

GROUP DEMAND DRPI GROUP DEMAND DRPI H4 D8 _____ _____

Shutdown H12 E-1 E-1 E M8 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1, Table 4-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ** ## Y N C5 E13 _____ _____

Shutdown N11 D-1 D-1 D L3 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1, Table 4-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ** ## Y N E3 C11 _____ _____

Shutdown L13 C-1 C-1 C N5 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1, Table 4-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ** ## Y N G3 C9 _____ _____

J13 B-1 B-1 N7 Shutdown C7 B

G13 _____ _____

N9 B-2 B-2 J3 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1, Table 4-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ** ## Y N D2 B12 _____ _____

M14 A-1 A-1 P4 Shutdown B4 A

D14 _____ _____

P12 A-2 A-2 M2 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1, Table 4-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ** ## Y N

1. YES REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance.

DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils.

This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any NO response.

COMMENTS:

D-6

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use TABLE 4 - CONTROL ROD BANKS INITIAL POSITION FINAL POSITION ROD BANK ROD NO.

GROUP DEMAND DRPI GROUP DEMAND DRPI H6 _____ _____

H10 A-1 A-1 F8 _____ _____

CONT A K8 A-2 A-2 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ## Y N F2 B10 B-1 B-1 K14 P6 B6 CONT B F14 _____ _____

P10 B-2 B-2 K2 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ** ## Y N H2 B8 _____ _____

H14 C-1 C-1 P8 F6 CONT C F10 _____ _____

K10 C-2 C-2 K6 EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ** ## Y N (N/A if a controlling bank.)

1. "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance.

DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils.

This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

- Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.

COMMENTS:

(Final)

D-7

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an Assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5.

3. Maintenance has recently completed packing adjustment of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv.

4. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 is required to be performed to verify operability of 1SI8806.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance for 1SI8806, steps F.1 and F.3.

2. Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance.

3. Applicable LCOs have been entered.

1 SIM-223

TASK TITLE: 1SI8806 SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance JPM No.: SIM-223 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4E.AM-23 K&A No.: 006000A4.07 TASK No.: R-AM-068 K&A IMP: 4.4/4.4 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4, 5 JPM TIME: ___ MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, Rev. 5 MATERIALS:

1. Marked up copy of 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, Rev 5.

2. Digital stopwatch.

TASK STANDARDS:

1. 1SI8806 stroke tested per surveillance.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an Assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5.

3. Maintenance has recently completed packing adjustment of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv.

4. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 is required to be performed to verify operability of 1SI8806.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance for 1SI8806, steps F.1 and F.3. (Cue: Hand examinee copy of surveillance).

2. Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance.

3. Applicable LCOs have been entered.

2 SIM-223

RECORD START TIME_____________

Note: Stroke times are determined using the dual valve indications on the MCB.

Note: If examinee mis-operates stopwatch and realizes it, allow re-performance of applicable step.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

1. Verify initial conditions

Review Prerequisites SAT UNSAT N/A (steps F.1.1 through F.1.3) Precautions Limitations Comments:

and Actions.

CUE: If asked, it is not desired to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-6

Verify IST coordinator listed on cover sheet

Obtain digital stopwatch.

2. Record as found position of 1SI8806

Determines and records SAT UNSAT N/A (step F.3.1) 1SI8806 as Open Comments:

3. Perform CLOSED stroke of Perform the following: SAT UNSAT N/A 1SI8806 (in accordance with steps o Verify open 1SI8806 Comments:

outlined in Attachment B).

Simultaneously start the stopwatch and close Note: Close stroke time for 1SI8806 1SI8806.

during this JPM should be within the

Stop the stopwatch alert and operable limits, (i.e. 6.9- when 1SI8806 indicates 11.5 sec.). If the examinee closed.

determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue.

Record the Stroke Closed Test Time.

o Record 1SI8806 MLB status light indication.

o Verify 1SI8806 Cue: If asked, the Unit Supervisor indicates closed on directs you to perform the Open 1PM06J.

Stroke Timing Step when opening 1SI8806.

3 SIM-223

4. Perform OPEN stroke of 1SI8806 Perform the following: SAT UNSAT N/A (in accordance with steps outlined o Verify close 1SI8806 Comments:

in Attachment A).

Simultaneously start the stopwatch and open 1SI8806.

Note: First open stroke time for

Stop the stopwatch 1SI8806 during this JPM should be when 1SI8806 indicates between the alert and operable open.

limits, (i.e. 11.8-14.1 sec.). If the

Record the Stroke Open examinee determines a stroke time Test Time.

outside this band then give the following cue. o Record 1SI8806 MLB status light indication.

o Verify 1SI8806 indicates open on 1PM06J.

Determine the open test time is within the OPERABLE Limits.

o Check the YES block in Cue: When informed as US, the VER OPER section acknowledge valve stroke time to indicate that 1SI8806 exceeds alert limit (when has been verified informed) operable.

Note: Alternate path begins here

5. Determine 1SI8806 open stroke Perform the following: SAT UNSAT N/A time is NOT within alert limit and

Determine the opening Comments:

perform valve stroke retest. test time is within the operability limits, but not Cue: When informed as US, within ALERT for min acknowledge valve stroke time time limit exceeds alert limit (when o May inform US of informed) problem at this point.

Re-CLOSES valve.

Note: Second open stroke time for

Simultaneously starts 1SI8806 during this JPM should be the stopwatch and within the alert and operable limits, opens 1SI8806.

(i.e. 6.9-11.5 sec.). If the examinee

Stop the stopwatch determines a stroke time outside this when 1SI8806 indicates band then give the following cue. open.

Record the stroke open retest time.

Determine the open retest time is within the alert and operability (OPER) Limits.

Cue : As US acknowledge need o Inform US that an IR for generating IR and ER-AA-321 needs to be generated to document first open stoke test to the IST coordinator time. documenting the initial open test results.

6. Acknowledge completion of Inform the Unit 1 US when SAT UNSAT N/A surveillance. you have completed the Comments:

surveillance.

4 SIM-223

(CUE:) THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME ___ _____________

5 SIM-200

SIMULATOR SETUP GUIDE:

Verify/perform TQ-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.

Establish the conditions of IC-4, mode 5.

Close SVAG valve MCC Feed Breakers Copy file sim223.cae to s:\opensim\monitor\examadmin (this must be done since the cae file will not run properly from a pen drive)

Run sim223setup.cae from disk Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist Place simulator in RUN.

COMMENTS:

Provide copy of 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Ensure stop watch is available (Final) 6 SIM-223

WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61 ATTACHMENT 10 SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID-WEST SITES ONLY)

Page 1 of 1 Unit: _1__ Procedure: 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5____

PMID/RQ: ______123456____ Work Order #: __ N/A____________

PMID/RQ

Title:

UNIT ONE SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEM SVAG VALVE STROKE SURV____

PMID/RQ Due Date: ___ N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A Signature/Authorization Approval Review: Name Date Time Shift Authorization to Start Work: ___Joe Supervisor ______ Today 5 min ago Work Started __________________________ ________ ________

Work Stopped: __________________________ ________ ________

Supv Review of Work Completion: __________________________ ________ ________

ANI Review of work package: __________________________ ________ ________

Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO (Work Started date (above shall be the credit date unless otherwise explained)

Complete one of the following:

Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# _______

Below: If crediting per another WO, verify credit date is Work Started date of referenced WO.

_________ Complete Sat - Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat - Credit Surveillance No Work Performed - Credit Surveillance Failed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)

No Work Performed - Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance)

Comments (partial surveillance) PMT 1SI8806 ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED)

__ IST Coordinator __ ____________________________________ ________

Title Signature Date

WC-AA-111 Revision 4 Page 25 of 61

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use COMMON TRAIN UNIT ONE SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEM SVAG VALVE STROKE SURVEILLANCE A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY The purpose of this procedure is to verify that the Safety Injection System (SVAG) valves stroke within their specified time when tested pursuant to Tech Spec 5.5.8.

Testing will be performed after any maintenance affecting valve operability and is applicable for MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Spec LCOs:

a. 3.4.6 d. 3.4.3

b. 3.4.7 e. 3.5.2

c. 3.4.8 f. 3.5.3

2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: 5.5.8

3. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP RH-6, Placing the RH System in Shutdown Cooling.

b. ER-AA-321, Administrative Requirements for Inservice Testing.

c. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-3A, Unit One SI System SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance.

d. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-6, Common Train SI System Isolation Valve Indication Surveillance.

e. BwOP SI-100, Energizing and De-Energizing SVAG Valve MCCs and SI Accumulator Outlet Valves in Modes One Through Four

4. Station Drawings: M-61

5. In Service Testing Program Plan for Valves (IST Program).

6. EC350458, LCOAR Entry During Testing of 1SI8804B and 1CV8804A during surveillance testing.

1

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use B. 7. AT 562197-03, Regulatory Commitment (Regarding the implementation of administrative controls to ensure that one complete ECCS train can be actuated automatically must be maintained when a logic train is INOPERABLE.)

C. PREREQUISITES

1. Receive permission to perform the surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover sheet signed and dated.

2. This surveillance must be performed in MODE 5, 6 or defueled. A partial surveillance may be performed in any MODE per the discretion of the Shift Manager or designee.

3. A digital stopwatch will be necessary to perform this surveillance.

4. The applicable Safety Injection Pump must not be operating.

5. Execution of this procedure in Modes 1-4 may require the use of BwOP SI-100.

SVAG valve MCCs will be energized/de-energized per BwOP SI-100.

6. If the Unit is in Mode 4, the 1CV8804A cannot be stroked.

7. If the Unit is in Modes 1-3, both trains of ECCS pumps (SI, CV, and RH) must be operable prior to testing the 1CV8804A.

8. If the Unit is in Modes 1-4, THEN the OPPOSITE train of SSPS and Reactor Trip Breaker (RTB) train must be OPERABLE prior to performing any actions that renders an ECCS train INOPERABLE in order to ensure the regulatory commitments of License Amendment No. 148 are maintained.

D. PRECAUTIONS

1. VERIFY that all requirements of the applicable RWP have been met.

2. Monitor for potential leak/sneak paths prior to stroking valves.

3. If the Unit is in Modes 1-3, OPENING 1CV8804A renders both trains of ECCS inoperable due to the potential impact on RH pump ECCS flow.

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. As stated in Tech Spec LCOs 3.4.6, 3.4.7, 3.4.8, 3.4.3, 3.5.2, and 3.5.3.

2. In the event a valve fails to change position, or the stroke time exceeds the Operability (Oper) Limit during surveillance performance, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY the Shift Manager or designee to declare the valve inoperable and initiate corrective actions.

2

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use E. 3. In the event a valve stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, the following should be performed:

a. The Shift Manager or designee must be notified

b. The valve should be stroked a second time.

c. INITIATE an IR for the IST Coordinator to analyze and document the initial stroke and the cause of the deviation (per ER-AA-321).

d. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, then INITIATE an IR for the IST Coordinator to perform a valve evaluation with a 96 hour0.00111 days 0.0267 hours 1.587302e-4 weeks 3.6528e-5 months time clock per ER-AA-321. N/A if second stroke is within Alert Limits. The valve is considered operable until the evaluation is complete. The Dequip program is an acceptable tracking method.

4. For any valve declared inoperable demonstrate acceptable operation after required corrective action has been taken but before returning the valve to service.

5. IF ALARA concerns permit, THEN local stroke timing and local examination of the valve should be performed if Operability Acceptance Criteria (Oper Limit) is not met.

6. Per the requirements of the IST Program, Tech Spec 5.5.8, valve stroke time limits SHALL be set up which accurately reflect the way the valve strokes. These times, in some instances, may be more limiting than other Tech Spec values.

Per the IST Program requirements, Tech Spec 5.5.8, these stroke times SHALL be the basis on which the valve is declared inoperable.

7. If possible, PERFORM 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-6 (when required) concurrently with this procedure to obtain both valve stroke timing data and indication check documentation.

8. EM Department assistance will be required to install jumpers during performance of this surveillance. (Section F.2)

9. EC 350458 has determined that 1SI8804B should not be opened if the Unit is in Mode 4 due to the potential impact on the RH train that is operable for LCO 3.5.3. Therefore, the 1SI8804B SHALL not be tested when the Unit is in Mode 4.

3

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. MAIN BODY 0.0 SURVEILLANCE OVERVIEW 0.1 The parallel subsection strings are independent of one another so that they may be performed in any order or individually if performance of a partial surveillance is required.

0.2 Parallel subsections SHALL NOT be performed simultaneously without the permission of the Shift Manager or designee.

0.3 Steps for timing the valve strokes (Attachments A and B) are repeated for each valve being stroked. Record data from the valve strokes in the appropriate blocks of the table.

0.4 The timing valve strokes may be performed in any order to minimize the number of needless valve strokes.

0.5 The subsections of this surveillance perform the following.

F.1.0 Establish Initial Conditions F.2.0 Stroke test of 1CV8804A, RH Hx 1A PPs Isol Vlv.

F.3.0 Stroke test of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv.

F.4.0 Stroke test of 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv.

F.5.0 Stroke test of 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Lets Isol Vlv.

F.6.0 Stroke test of 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv.

START 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 END 4

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. 1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS NOTE Initial each step in the space provided adjacent to the procedure step number AFTER the step has been SUCCESSFULLY completed. Person(s) performing VERIFICATIONS SHALL initial in the space provided following the step.

NOTE "Valve stroke time" is defined as the time duration from the instant of handswitch (or manual relay) actuation until the instant of indication of the valve's intended final position.

_____ 1.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

_____ 1.2 VERIFY the IST Coordinator is listed on the Data Package Cover Sheet to review the results.

_____ 1.3 OBTAIN a digital stopwatch.

5

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. 2.0 STROKE TEST OF 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A TO CV PPS ISOL VLV.

NOTE VERIFY the 1A RH Pump discharge pressure is below 220 psig to prevent lifting the CV pump suction relief while stroking 1CV8804A.

2.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of the following equipment (CIRCLE as appropriate):

_____ 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A & D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1RH01PA, 1A RHR Pump NAC/NAT/PTL NOTE Verify the 1A RH Pump discharge pressure is below 200 psig to prevent lifting the CV pump suction relief while stroking 1CV8804A.

_____ 2.2 VERIFY/PLACE the Train B Residual Heat Removal System in operation to fulfill the shutdown cooling function as requested by the Shift Manager (N/A if shutdown cooling is not required).

_____ 2.3 VERIFY/STOP 1RH01PA, 1A Residual Heat Removal Pump.

2.4 IF the Unit is in Modes 5, 6, or DEFUELED, perform the following:

_____ a. VERIFY the 1A RH Train is NOT REQUIRED to be OPERABLE.

_____ b. PLACE 1RH01PA C/S in PTL.

6

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use NOTE Closing 1RH8701A or 1RH8701B will isolate the "A" Train RH suction relief valve. PRIOR to performing this action in Modes 4, 5, and 6, with the reactor head installed, verify the requirements of Tech Spec 3.4.9.3 are met F. 2.5 VERIFY/CLOSE the following:

_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.

One of the following: (Mark "N/A" for valve not manipulated)

_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

_____ 1CV8804A, RH Hx 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.

NOTE The jumper PLACED in the next step will simulate the 1SI8811A OPEN and 1SI8813 CLOSED.

_____ 2.6 IF the Unit is in Modes 1, 2, or 3, ENTER LCO 3.5.2 Condition A.

_____ 2.7 NOTIFY EMD to PLACE a Jumper between Terminal 3 in the FRONT compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5 and Terminal 28 in the REAR of compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5.

INSTALLED BY ___________________ DATE/TIME _______/_______

VERIFICATION _____ DATE/TIME _______/_______

7

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use CAUTION Immediately CLOSE 1CV8804A in the event a safety injection actuates during the stroke test.

CAUTION Prior to opening 1CV8804A, verify there are no flow paths created to allow gravity fill of the RWST or VCT to the cavity. (i.e.; RH Discharge Lines)

F ____ 2.8 IF the Unit is in Modes 1, 2, or 3, ENTER LCO 3.5.2 Condition B.

NOTE 1SI8809A is REQUIRED to remain OPEN and DEENERGIZED in MODES 1-4.

NOTE Mark Step 2.9 N/A if BOTH RH Trains are REQUIRED to be OPERABLE and it is desired to stroke 1CV8804A with 1SI8809A and 1RH8716A open.

2.9 IF the Unit is in Modes 5, 6, or DEFUELED, perform the following:

_____ a. VERIFY BwOP RH-6, Attachment A or Attachment B is NOT in progress.

_____ b. CLOSE 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

_____ c. CLOSE 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A and D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

_____ 2.10 PERFORM an OPEN Valve Stroke Test of 1CV8804A at 1PM05J. (PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment A, and RECORD in Data Table).

Valve: 1CV8804A Panel: 1PM05J Stroke @ Oper @ Alert Status @ Test @ Retest Ver Oper Init Limits ¢ Limits ¢ Lights Time ¢ Time ¢ OPEN Max 10.0 Min 7.0 LIT YES Max N/A DARK NO

@ All limits and times are in seconds.

8

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. 2.11 RESTORE the following to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate):

_____ 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A & D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1RH01PA, 1A RHR Pump NAC/NAT/PTL VERIFICATION _____

_____ 2.12 EXIT LCO 3.5.2 Condition B, if entered due to the performance of this procedure.

_____ 2.13 NOTIFY EMD to REMOVE the Jumper that was installed between Terminal 3 in the FRONT compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5 and Terminal 28 in the REAR of compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5.

REMOVED BY ___________________ DATE/TIME _______/_______

VERIFICATION _____ DATE/TIME _______/_______

_____ 2.14 EXIT LCO 3.5.2 Condition A, if entered due to the performance of this procedure.

_____ 2.15 RETURN the Residual Heat Removal System to operation as requested by the Shift Manager.

9

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. 3.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8806, SI PPS SUC FROM RWST ISOL VLV.

Valve: 1SI8806 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper @ Alert Status @ Test @ Retest Ver Oper Init Limits ¢ Limits ¢ Lights Time ¢ Time ¢ OPEN Max 14.1 Min 7.1 LIT YES Max 11.8 DARK NO CLOSE Max 13.8 Min 6.9 LIT YES Max 11.5 DARK NO

_____ 3.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 3.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8806 at 1PM06J.

(PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).

_____ 3.3 RESTORE 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

4.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8813, SI PPS MINIFLOW ISOL VLV.

Valve: 1SI8813 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper @ Alert Status @ Test @ Retest Ver Oper Init Limits ¢ Limits ¢ Lights Time ¢ Time ¢ CLOSE Max 10.0 Min 6.4 LIT YES Max N/A DARK NO

_____ 4.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 4.2 VERIFY/OPEN 1SI8813 (verify OPEN light indication).

_____ 4.3 PERFORM a CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8813 at 1PM06J. (PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment B and RECORD in the Data Table).

_____ 4.4 RESTORE 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

@ All limits and times are in seconds.

10

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. 5.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8835, SI PP TO COLD LEGS ISOL VLV.

Valve: 1SI8835 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper @ Alert Status @ Test @ Retest Ver Oper Init Limits ¢ Limits ¢ Lights Time ¢ Time ¢ OPEN Max 9.9 Min 5.0 LIT YES Max 8.3 DARK NO CLOSE Max 9.5 Min 4.7 LIT YES Max 7.9 DARK NO

_____ 5.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 5.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8835 at 1PM06J.

(PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).

_____ 5.3 RESTORE 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

6.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8840, RH TO HOT LEGS ISOL VLV.

Valve: 1SI8840 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper @ Alert Status @ Test @ Retest Ver Oper Init Limits ¢ Limits ¢ Lights Time ¢ Time ¢ OPEN Max 15.0 Min 10.5 LIT YES Max 14.3 DARK NO CLOSE Max 14.2 Min 9.6 LIT YES Max 13.0 DARK NO

_____ 6.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate):

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 6.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8840 at 1PM06J.

(PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).

_____ 6.3 RESTORE 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate).

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

@ All limits and times are in seconds.

11

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

1. Each valve must have been verified to stroke within the Operability (OPER)

Limits.

2. Each valve must have been verified in accordance with one of the following:

a. The valve stroke time was within the Alert Limits.

b. The valve stroke time exceeded the Alert Limits, but was within the Operability (Oper) Limits and the following criteria have been met:

1) The valve was stroked a second time.

2) The IST Coordinator has been NOTIFIED to PERFORM an evaluation to document valve operability per ER-AA-321 and attach it to this surveillance.

3) The second valve stroke time exceeded the Alert Limits, but was within the Operability (Oper) Limits and the valve is being tracked with a 96 hour0.00111 days 0.0267 hours 1.587302e-4 weeks 3.6528e-5 months clock to complete the ER-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.) (The Dequip program is an acceptable tracking method.)

12

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A TIMING VALVES IN THE OPEN DIRECTION

1. VERIFY/CLOSE the valve.

2. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and OPEN the valve with its handswitch.

3. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates OPEN.

¢ 4. RECORD the stroke OPEN TEST TIME.

5. RECORD the MLB status light indication associated with the valve.

6. VERIFY the valve indicates OPEN on the control panel.

¢ 7. VERIFY the OPEN TEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

8. If the valve is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS, but is not within ALERT LIMITS, PERFORM the following (otherwise N/A):

a. VERIFY/CLOSE the valve (May be performed in conjunction with a close stroke timing step).

b. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and OPEN the valve with its handswitch.

c. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates OPEN.

¢ d. RECORD the stroke OPEN RETEST TIME.

¢ e. VERIFY the OPEN RETEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER)

LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

f. Attach ER-AA-321 to this surveillance for the IST Coordinator to evaluate.

g. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, then TRACK the valve with a 96 hour0.00111 days 0.0267 hours 1.587302e-4 weeks 3.6528e-5 months clock to complete the ER-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.)

9. RETURN the valve to the "AS FOUND" position or as designated by the Shift Manager or designee (May be performed in conjunction with a close stroke timing step).

13

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B TIMING VALVES IN THE CLOSE DIRECTION

1. VERIFY/OPEN the valve.

2. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and CLOSE the valve with its handswitch.

3. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates CLOSED.

¢ 4. RECORD the stroke CLOSED TEST TIME.

5. RECORD the MLB status light indication associated with the valve.

6. VERIFY the valve indicates CLOSED on the control panel.

¢ 7. VERIFY the CLOSED TEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS.

(If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

8. If the valve is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS, but is not within ALERT LIMITS, PERFORM the following (otherwise N/A):

a. VERIFY/OPEN the valve (May be performed in conjunction with an open stroke timing step).

b. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and CLOSE the valve with its handswitch.

c. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates CLOSED.

¢ d. RECORD the CLOSED RETEST TIME.

¢ e. VERIFY the CLOSED RETEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER)

LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

f. Attach ER-AA-321 to this surveillance for the IST Coordinator to evaluate.

g. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, then TRACK the valve with a 96 hour0.00111 days 0.0267 hours 1.587302e-4 weeks 3.6528e-5 months clock to complete the ER-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.)

9. RETURN the valve to the "AS FOUND" position or as designated by the Shift Manager or designee (May be performed in conjunction with an open stroke timing step).

(Final) 14

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.

2. Unit 1 has recently returned to full power following power ascension.

3. PRZ B/U HTR GRP A was placed in ON to facilitate proper chemical mixing in the pressurizer during the unit ramp.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to place the PRZ B/U HTR GRP A to AUTO per BwOP RY-11.

2. Inform the US when the evolution is complete.

SIM-305A 1

TASK TITLE: Place PZR B/U Heater Group from ON to AUTO JPM No.: SIM 305A REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4E.AM-18 K&A No.: 010000A4.02 TASK No.: R-AM-022, Use Operating Department Procedures K&A IMP: 3.6/3.4 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 4, 5, 6 JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 20 MINUTES EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. BwOP RY-11, Rev. 2, PRESSURIZER HEATER OPERATION .

MATERIALS:

1. BwOP RY-11 TASK STANDARDS:

1. Place PRZ B/U heater group in auto per BwOP RY-11.

2. Recognize inability of variable heaters to maintain pressurizer pressure

3. Re-energize B/U heater group.

TASK CONDITIONS:

SIM-305A 2

1. You are the Unit 1 NSO.

2. Unit 1 has recently returned to full power following power ascension.

3. PRZ B/U HTR GRP A was placed in ON to facilitate proper chemical mixing in the pressurizer during the unit ramp.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to place the PRZ B/U HTR GRP A to AUTO per BwOP RY-11.

2. Inform the US when the evolution is complete.

SIM-305A 3

RECORD START TIME PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

1. Refer to BwOP RY-11.

Refer to BwOP RY-11. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

CUE: Prerequisites, precautions,

Verify all applicable limitations and actions are prerequisites, met. precautions limitations and actions are addressed.

CUE: Another NSO will monitor the

Verify Pressurizer computer points in step 2. Pressure is Pressurizer Pressure is 2235 approximately 2235 psig on lowest computer point. psig from the lowest computer point indication P0480, CUE: If asked, the SM and System P0481, P0482, P0483.

Engineer have concurred with performance of this evolution.

(see caution prior to step 3)

2. At 1PM05J, places 1PK-455A in

Depresses Manual SAT UNSAT N/A Manual pushbutton on 1PK-455A.

Comments:

3. Raise PZR pressure to approx. 2250

Perform the following: SAT UNSAT N/A psig.

Lower 1PK-455A demand until pressurizer pressure is Comments:

approx. 2250 psig.

(2245-2260)

4. Place B/U HTR GRP A to AUTO

Perform the following: SAT UNSAT N/A

Place control switch for B/U HTR GRP A CONTACTOR in Comments:

AUTO SIM-305A 4

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

5. Maintain RY pressure in desired

Perform the following: SAT UNSAT N/A band by manually controlling PZR pressure controller.

Adjust 1PK-455A o Monitor pressurizer Comments:

pressure.

o Maintains pressure between 2235 and 2250 psig by adjusting the master PZR CUE: (provide cue after examinee pressure controller in has stabilized PZR pressure to manual.

his/her satisfaction and is

STABILIZE PZR waiting for 10 minutes to pressure at elapse) 10 minutes has approximately 2235 elapsed. psig (2230-2240 psig).

o IF PZR spray valve demand > 0, or variable heater load <

100 amps, THEN take other backup heaters to the AUTO position, by repeating step 3.

ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS*

SIM-305A 5

NOTE: The auto portion of the master pressurizer pressure controller failed when the controller was placed in manual. The controller output will cause sprays to open and lower PZR pressure.

Additionally, lowering controller demand at this point will activate alarm 1-12-C1, PZR PRESS CONT DEV LOW HTRS ON. Critical step successful completion requires stabilizing RCS pressure without allowing pressure to drop below 2185 psig.

6. Determines PZR Master Pressure Place the PZR Master SAT UNSAT N/A Controller does not function in Pressure Controller in AUTO AUTO and maintains manual PZR as follows:

pressure control. Comments:

o VERIFY/SET the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK-455A, potentiometer to maintain 2235 psig.

VERIFY/PLACE the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK-455A, in AUTO.

VERIFY that the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK-455A, is controlling PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig in Auto.

Examinee notes that the controller is causing reduced PZR Pressure and places the controller back in manual and stabilizes PZR pressure at 2235 psig (2230-2240 psig).

(CUE:) THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME __________

COMMENTS:

SIM-305A 6

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-305 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): 100% power steady state.

Place B/U HTRS GRP A CONTACTOR to ON Insert malfunction below Allow pressurizer pressure to stabilize in auto.

MALFUNCTION #S:

Activate CAE sim305A and verify the following:

trgset 1 "ZLO1PK455A(2)==1" IMF RX15 (1 0) 2270 to trigger Malfunction RX15 to 2270 psig when the controller is placed in manual. This fails the auto portion of the controller to a higher output value.

COMMENTS:

SIM-305A 7

BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use PRESSURIZER HEATER OPERATION A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY The purpose of this procedure is to provide direction for operating with the least amount of PZR heaters required to maintain pressure and provide adequate mixing of the Pressurizer in MODES 1, 2, and 3.

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Spec LCO 3.4.9 and 3.4.1.

2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: SR 3.4.9.2

3. Station Procedure: BwOL 3.4.9, LCOAR, Reactor Coolant System -Pressurizer.

4. UFSAR 15.0.1.1 Condition 1 Normal Operation and Operational Transients, and 4.4.2.2.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Technology C. PREREQUISITES

1. Receive permission from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performing this procedure.

2. Perform a pre-job briefing with all personnel involved covering the performance of this procedure and expected results.

3. The Unit is stable at Normal Operating Pressure and Normal Operating Temperature.

D. PRECAUTIONS

1. At least 2 groups of Pressurizer heaters shall be operable, each with a capacity of at least 150 KW, in Modes 1-3.

2. If PZR pressure starts to drop below 2229 psig on the lowest reading channel/computer point with both PZR spray valves indicating ZERO demand, IMMEDIATELY turn on Back-up Heaters as necessary to avoid PZR pressure decreasing below 2209 psig.

1

BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. As stated in Tech Spec LCO 3.4.9

2. Do NOT exceed Pressurizer Pressure of 2260 PSIG.

3. Do NOT allow Pressurizer Pressure to drop below 2209 PSIG. If Pressurizer Pressure decreases below 2209 PSIG, then LCOAR _BwOL 3.4.1 must be entered.

4. If any primary or secondary manipulations need to be performed, do NOT proceed with this procedure until all Unit conditions are stable. Do NOT perform any primary or secondary manipulations while this procedure is in progress.

2

BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use CAUTION If any primary or secondary manipulations need to be performed, do NOT proceed with this procedure until all unit conditions are stable. Do NOT perform any primary or secondary manipulations while this procedure is in progress.

F. MAIN BODY

1. VERIFY Pressurizer pressure is at approximately 2235 psig from the lowest computer point indication P0480, P0481, P0482, P0483.

2. VERIFY the following computer points can be monitored:

PZR Pressure P0480 PZR Pressure P0481 PZR Pressure P0482 PZR Pressure P0483 PZR Spray Water A Inlet Temp T0483 PZR Spray Water B Inlet Temp T0484 PZR Spray Cont 1 F0483 PZR Spray Cont 2 F0484 PZR Steam Temp T0481 3

BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use CAUTION If PZR spray demand is zero, and the variable heaters are drawing current less than 100 amps, cautiously perform the next step with the concurrence of the Shift Manager and System Engineer. If PZR spray demand is zero and the variable heaters are drawing current greater than 100 amps, then Step 3 is N/A.

NOTE Perform the following step while monitoring PZR pressure. The NSO may make any adjustments to the PZR and/or unit to stabilize parameters.

F. 3. To place a B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTOR in the AUTO position from the ON position, PERFORM the following:

a. VERIFY/PLACE in MANUAL Master PZR Pressure Controller, _PK-455A.

b. SLOWLY DECREASE the Master PZR Pressure Controller, _PK 455A, demand until PZR pressure increases to approximately 2250 psig.

CAUTION If PZR pressure starts to drop below 2229 psig on the lowest reading channel/computer point with both PZR spray valves indicating zero demand, immediately turn on back-up heaters as necessary to avoid PZR pressure decreasing below 2209 psig.

c. PLACE the desired B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTOR C/S into AUTO.

d. MAINTAIN pressure between 2235 and 2250 psig by adjusting master PZR pressure controller _PK-455A as required until variable heaters energize and/or spray valves are closed.

4

BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use CAUTION When a B/U heater is deenergized, it will take some time to dissipate its latent heat. PZR pressure should be monitored at least 10 minutes before the pressure is considered stable.

F. 3. e. STABILIZE PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig.

f. IF PZR spray valve demand is greater than zero, or variable heater load is less than 100 amps, THEN CONTINUE to take other backup heaters to the AUTO position as directed by Unit Supervisor, by repeating Step 3 for the other desired B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTORS (Otherwise proceed to next Step).

4. VERIFY/SET the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK-455A, potentiometer to maintain 2235 psig.

5. VERIFY/PLACE the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK-455A , in AUTO.

6. VERIFY that the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK-455A, is controlling PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig in Auto.

(Final) 5

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.

2. Both Units are in Mode 5.

3. Yesterday, a fire in the MCR required implementation of 1/2BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBLITY.

4. The fire is now extinguished. Individual systems and components are being evaluated by Engineering and then released to Operations to transfer control to the MCR from the RSDP.

Engineering has just released the 1B SX pump for transfer of control back to the MCR.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to coordinate with the NSO at the RSDP for Unit 1 to restore remote control of the 1B SX pump from the MCR per 1BwOA PRI-5 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM step 5.

2. NO switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel for the event.

Page 1 of 5 SIM-410S

TASK TITLE: Restore Remote Control of 1B SX Pump from MCR JPM No.: SIM-410S REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.SX-03 K&A No.: 076000A4.01 TASK No.: R-SX-002/003, Startup/shutdown an Essential K&A IMP: 2.9/2.9 Service Water pump TRAINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Trainee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*)4, 6 COMPLETION TIME: 22 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: N/A ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR CONTROL ROOM GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106.

MATERIALS:

1. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.

2. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106 Attachment A, REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP.

3. BwAR 1-2-A1 SX PUMP TRIP, Rev. 7.

TASK STANDARDS:

1. Restore control of 1B SX pump to MCR.

2. Respond to 1B SX pump trip and start 1A SX pump.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Assist NSO.

2. Both Units are in Mode 5.

3. Yesterday, a fire in the MCR required implementation of 1/2BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBLITY.

4. The fire is now extinguished. Individual systems and components are being evaluated by Engineering and then released to Operations to transfer control to the MCR from the RSDP.

Engineering has just released the 1B SX pump for transfer of control back to the MCR.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to coordinate with the NSO at the RSDP for Unit 1 to restore remote control of the 1B SX pump from the MCR per 1BwOA PRI-5 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM step 5.

2. NO switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel for the event.

(Examiner hand trainee copy of Attachments A and D of 1BwOA PRI-5)

Page 2 of 5 SIM-410S

RECORD START TIME:

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

1. Refer to 1BwOA PRI-5, Refer to 1BwOA PRI-5, SAT UNSAT N/A CONTROL ROOM CONTROL ROOM Comments:

INACCESIBILITY, Attachment D, INACCESIBILITY, Attachment RESTORING OPERATIONS D, RESTORING FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM. OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.

Copy of 1BwOA PRI-5 Attachments A and D provided with initiating cue.

2. Review logs for all local actions Review logs for all local SAT UNSAT N/A taken. actions taken. Comments:

CUE: Logs were previously reviewed and there are no issues related to the pump control transfer.

3. Restore indications to MCR by Restore indications to MCR by SAT UNSAT N/A placing Fire Hazards Panel placing Fire Hazards Panel Comments:

switches to - NORMAL. switches to - NORMAL.

INITIATING CUE: No

Switches are in normal.

switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel.

4. Transfer controls listed in Transfer controls listed in SAT UNSAT N/A Attachment A back to the MCR Attachment A back to the Comments:

one at a time. MCR one at a time.

CUE: When asked, report 1B SX pump control switch position at RSP is after-start.

At 1PM06J places C/S for CUE: Acknowledge as the 1SX01PB in normal after-NSO at the remote close.

shutdown panel to place

Place LOCAL/REMOTE the LOCAL/REMOTE switch at RSP in remote.

switch for 1B SX pump to remote.

NOTE: Cue the Simulator operator to initiate the pre-established commands to model placing the LOCAL/REMOTE switch in remote. Shortly after restoring control to the MCR, the 1B SX pump will trip.

Page 3 of 5 SIM-410S

- ALTERNATE PATH START**

5. Respond to 1B SX pump Trip Respond to 1B SX pump trip SAT UNSAT N/A using BwAR 1-2-A1 Comments:

At 1PM06J pulls BwAR

6. Verify/Align SX flowpath to meet Perform the following at SAT UNSAT N/A 1A SX pump start interlocks and 1PM06J: Comments:

Start 1A SX Pump o Verify/OPEN 1SX001A (is OPEN).

o Verify/OPEN 1SX016A (is open)

Verify/OPEN 1SX027A (currently closed) (must be performed, valve is CLOSED, examinee must OPEN the valve)

Places C/S for 1A SX pump to START and starts pump (initially in standby, RUNNING at completion of action).

7. Verify voltage on ALL 3 phases of Verify voltage on ALL 3 SAT UNSAT N/A 4KV bus > 3990 volts. phases of 4KV bus (141) > Comments:

CUE: ALL 3 phases are > 3990 3990 volts.

Volts.

CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:

Page 4 of 5 SIM-410S

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-410S REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): Any mode with SX available.

MALFUNCTION #S:

1. Verify/place the 1B SX pump in service and secure the 1A SX pump.

2. Secure the 1A and 1C RCFCs completely.

3. Swap to 1B Containment Chiller then CLOSE 1SX027A.

Perform Items 4-6 or run CAE SIM-410S SETUP then continue with item 7.

4. Override Annunciator 1-2-E1 SX PUMP LOCAL CONT IMF PB2271 ON.

5. Override the 1B SX pump control switch to Normal After-close IOR ZDI1SX01PB NAC.

6. Override the lights for the 1B SX Pump off using the following:

a. IOR ZLO1SX01PB1 OFF (overrides STOP light to off)

b. IOR ZLO1SX01PB3 OFF (overrides RUN light off)

7. Place the physical control switch for 1B SX pump in PTL.

The simulator is now ready for the start of the JPM. You (Simulator Operator) will be required to monitor the progress of the JPM, and when cued by the examiner to perform the NSO action at the RSDP to place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch for the 1B SX pump in REMOTE, perform the following:

Perform the following (set on a trigger or run CAE SIM-410S RSDP switch to REMOTE):

8. DMF PB2271 (clears Annunciator 1-2-E1)

9. DOR ZDI1SX01PB (restores control of 1B SX C/S to the physical switch)

10. DOR ZLO1SX01PB1 (restores STOP light indication)

11. DOR ZLO1SX01PB3 (restores RUN light indication)

12. IMF SW01B 3 (trips 1B SX pump with 3 second delay)

COMMENTS:

1. This JPM requires that the Simulator Operator be available to perform action as the NSO at the Unit 1 RSDP in restoring control of the 1B SX pump to the MCR.

Page 5 of 5 SIM-410S

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 A. PURPOSE This procedure provides actions required to take the plant to Cold Shutdown in the event that the Main Control Room must be evacuated.

B. SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS This procedure is entered from 0BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY when the MCR must be evacuated.

Page 1 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED (PG 1 OF 1)

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 SECTION SECTION:: TITLE:

MAIN BODY ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP ATTACHMENT B (Page 53) LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS ATTACHMENT C (Page 57) INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS ATTACHMENT D (Page 58) RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET ATTACHMENT F (Page 78) SI TERMINATION ATTACHMENT G (Page 86) *MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI

-END-Page 2 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1 VERIFY REACTOR TRIP TRIP::

a. Trip Reactor

b. Check reactor trip and bypass b. Locally trip the breakers.

breakers - OPEN OPEN::

RTA and BYA RTB and BYB

c. Check rod bottom lights - LIT c. IF TWO OR more rods are NOT fully inserted, THEN initiate boration:

1) Start the Boric Acid transfer pump.

2) Open the emergency boration valve, 1CV8104.

d. Check Neutron Flux - DROPPPING 2 CHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATION REQUIRED REQUIRED::

a. Fire in the MCR requires - a. GO TO Step 3.

IMMEDIATE EVACUATION

b. GO TO Step 7 (Page 5) 3 VERIFY TURBINE TRIPPED TRIPPED:: Manually trip the turbine.

All Turbine throttle valves - IF any throttle AND any CLOSED governor valve are open, THEN locally trip the turbine All Turbine governor valves - at the pedestal.

CLOSED 4 VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES BUSES:

Locally restore at least ONE 4KV ESF bus per:

ESF buses - BOTH ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:

1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV Bus 141 ESF BUS:

Bus 142 o ATTACHMENT B (1A DG) o ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)

Page 3 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 5 VERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATION :

ISOLATION:

a. Feedwater isolation monitor a. Manually close the lights - LIT valve(s).

IF any feedwater reg valve will NOT close, THEN close the associated 1FW006 valve.

b. Trip Feedwater pumps: b. Locally trip the pumps.

FW pump 1A FW pump 1B FW pump 1C Startup Feedwater pump

c. Trip HD pumps: c. Locally trip the pumps.

HD pump 1A HD pump 1B HD pump 1C Page 4 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 6 PREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONS :

OPERATIONS:

a. Verify letdown divert valve in - AUTO AUTO::

1CV112A

b. Establish - 45 GPM LETDOWN

c. Place PZR PRESSURE CONTROL CHANNEL SELECTOR to - 457/458

d. Place PZR LEVEL CONTROL CHANNEL SELECTOR to - 461/460

e. Pick up radio

f. Open RCS loop sample containment isolation valves:

1PS9356A (1PM11J) 1PS9356B (1PM11J)

g. Open PZR liquid sample containment isolation valves:

1PS9355A (1PM11J) 1PS9355B (1PM11J)

h. Open PZR steam sample containment isolation valves:

1PS9354A (1PM11J) 1PS9354B (1PM11J) 7 DISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORM ATTACHMENT B (Page 53)

Page 5 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ CAUTION Taking ANY control switch on the Fire Hazards Panel to the FIRE position:

Removes ALL indications from the RSP and MCR.

Feeds a low signal to the affected loop.

May cause ESF actuations if another channel is already tripped OR in test.

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º 8 ACTIVATE RSP RSP:

a. Unit Supervisor and NSO go to RSP

b. Align RSP per ATTACHMENT A (Page 49)

c. Check following indications - c. Dispatch an operator to AVAILABLE AVAILABLE:: the Fire Hazards Panel (426' S12 CWA) to align Source Range NI needed instrumentation.

Intermediate Range NI SG pressures SG wide range levels PZR pressure PZR level RCS hot leg temperatures RCS cold leg temperatures

d. Maintain log of:

All jumpers installed All local actions taken Page 6 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 9 MCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIRE FIRE:: GO TO STEP 10.

a. Open the following breakers:

MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)

MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)

b. Locally check CNMT sump b. Perform the following:

isolation valves - CLOSED CLOSED::

1) Open the following 1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA) breaker(s):

1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA) o MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A) o MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)

2) Locally close RH pump suction from RWST isolation valve(s):

o 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm) o 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm) 10 CHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELS LEVELS::

a. AF pumps - AT LEAST ONE RUNNING a. Start an AF pump per:

o BwOP AF-5, MOTOR DRIVEN AUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMP

_A STARTUP ON RECIRC o BwOP AF-7, AUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMP _B (DIESEL) STARTUP ON RECIRC

b. Control AF flow to maintain ALL b. Locally fail air and SG wide range levels - BETWEEN throttle the 1AF005 flow 65% AND 70% control valves.

(364' P10 HANDWHEEL)

Page 7 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 11 CHECK SI STATUS STATUS::

a. Following equipment - NOT AUTO a. Dispatch an operator to STARTED STARTED:: verify SI actuation by checking status of BOTH SI CV Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNING pump breakers.

SX Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNING IF EITHER SI pump breaker is CLOSED, CC Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNING THEN GO TO ATTACHMENT F (Page 78).

Diesel Generators - NONE RUNNING 12 CHECK MODE MODE::

a. Unit in - MODE 3 a. IF the unit is in Mode 4, THEN GO TO Step 31 (Page 36).

IF the unit is in Mode 5 or 6, THEN GO TO Step 38b (Page 45).

b. RCS cooldown - NOT PREVIOUSLY b. GO TO Step 14 (Page 10).

IN PROGRESS Page 8 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 13 CHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE: :

a. Determine Tave using EITHER of a. Calculate Tave using the the following: following:

o Process computer points: o Saturation temperature for SG pressure in place o T0400 RCL1 1 TAVG of cold leg wide range o T0420 RCL2 1 TAVG temperature.

o T0440 RCL3 1 TAVG o T0460 RCL4 1 TAVG o RCS hot leg and cold leg temperatures from the

-OR- Fire Hazards Panel.

o Calculate using hot leg and cold leg wide range temperatures

b. RCS Tave - LESS THAN 561 561F b. Reduce Tave to 561 F:

561 o Manually open SG PORV(s).

-OR-o Locally open SG PORV(s) per BwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATION OF THE SG PORVs.

GO TO Step 14 (Next Page).

c. RCS Tave - STABLE c. IF RCS Tave drops less than 557 557F, THEN perform the following:

1) Close ALL MSIVs.

2) IF cooldown continues, THEN control AF flow.

Maintain flow greater than 500 GPM until wide range level is greater than 59% in at least ONE SG.

Page 9 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

NOTE *

The jumpers installed in Step 14a *

RNO also defeat the PZR heater level *

interlocks.

14 MONITOR PZR PRESSURE PRESSURE:

a. PZR pressure - GREATER THAN a. Perform the following:

2220 PSIG

1) IF PZR pressure is dropping, THEN trip RCP(s) as required to stop PZR pressure drop:

RCP 1D RCP 1C RCP 1B RCP 1A

2) IF PZR pressure is still dropping, THEN perform the following:

a) Place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch at the breaker in LOCAL:

1RY8000A (1RY455A)

MCC 131X2B A5 1RY8000B (1RY456)

MCC 132X2 C4 b) Locally close PORV block valves:

1RY8000A (1RY455A) 1RY8000B (1RY456)

Step continued on next page Page 10 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 14 (continued)

3) IF any PORV block valve can NOT be closed, THEN locally remove the PORV control power fuses to fail its associated PORV closed:

o 1RY455A (at 1DC10J):

FU-11 FU-12 o 1RY456 (at 1DC11J):

FU-46 FU-47

4) IF a controlled depressurization was in progress, THEN GO TO Step 15 (Page 14).

5) Verify PZR backup heaters are ON:

Group A Group B Step continued on next page Page 11 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 14 (continued)

IF ANY backup heater can NOT be energized AND PZR level is greater than 17%

17%,,

THEN jumper the control contactor to energize the heater:

o Group A contactor:

Install jumper in 1PL06J from Terminal Board 1, point 104, to Terminal Board 1, point 99.

o Group B contactor:

Install jumper in 1PL06J from Terminal Board 3, point 113, to Terminal Board 3, point 107.

b. PZR pressure - LESS THAN b. Perform the following:

2260 PSIG

1) Verify PZR heaters are OFF:

Group A Group B

2) Control pressure with the PZR aux spray valve:

1CV8145 Step continued on next page Page 12 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 14 (continued)

c. PZR pressure - STABLE AT OR c. Manually control PZR TRENDING TO 2235 PSIG pressure with PZR heaters and the PZR aux spray valve.

IF manual pressure control is NOT available, THEN perform the following while continuing with this procedure:

1) Fill the PZR solid.

2) Control charging flow to control PZR pressure.

Page 13 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 15 VERIFY RCP SEAL COOLING COOLING: :

a. Check following computer a. Perform the following:

points - AVAILABLE AVAILABLE::

1) Locally monitor RCP seal Seal water outlet injection flow:

temperature:

1FIT-0145 (1A RCP)

T0181 (RCP 1A) (383' V17)

T0182 (RCP 1B) 1FIT-0142 (1D RCP)

T0183 (RCP 1C) (383' V17)

T0184 (RCP 1D) 1FIT-0144 (1B RCP)

(364' U17)

Lower bearing temperature: 1FIT-0143 (1C RCP)

(364' U17)

T0417 (RCP 1A)

T0437 (RCP 1B) 2) IF seal injection flow T0457 (RCP 1C) is indicated on all RCPs, T0477 (RCP 1D) THEN GO TO Step 15d (Page 17).

3) IF any RCP with no indicated seal injection flow also has no indication of seal leakoff OR lower radial bearing temperature, THEN perform the following:

a) Trip affected RCP(s).

b) Close associated RCP seal injection manual flow control valve:

o 1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33) o 1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53) o 1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53) o 1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)

Step continued on next page Page 14 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 15 (continued)

4) Check CC flow to RCP thermal barriers between 150 GPM and 231 GPM GPM:

1FIS-685A (383' U18)

5) IF no CC flow is indicated to the RCP thermal barriers, THEN locally close CC from RCPs thermal barrier isolation valve:

1CC685 (395' CWA P-24)

6) IF no CC flow is indicated AND a fire has occurred in the plant, THEN locally close the following valve to provide double isolation of CC from the thermal barrier:

1CC9438 (395' R7)

7) GO TO Step 15c (Next Page).

Step continued on next page Page 15 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 15 (continued)

b. Check RCP temperatures - LESS b. Perform the following:

THAN LIMITS LIMITS::

1) Trip affected RCP(s).

Seal water outlet temperatures - LESS THAN 2) Close associated RCP 235 235F seal injection manual flow control valve:

Lower bearing temperatures -

LESS THAN 225 F 225 o 1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33) o 1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53) o 1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53) o 1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)

3) Locally close CC from RCPs thermal barrier isolation valve:

1CC685 (395' CWA P-24)

4) IF a fire has occured in the plant, THEN locally close the following valve to provide double isolation of CC from the RCP thermal barriers:

1CC9438 (395' R7)

c. Check CENT CHG pumps - AT LEAST c. WHEN CENT CHG pump suction ONE RUNNING has been aligned to the RWST, THEN start one CENT CHG pump.

Step continued on next page Page 16 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 15 (continued)

d. Throttle 1CV121 to maintain seal injection flow - BETWEEN 10 GPM AND 15 GPM PER PUMP (UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ISOLATED)

ISOLATED)::

1FIT-0145 (1A RCP) (383' V17) 1FIT-0142 (1D RCP) (383' V17) 1FIT-0144 (1B RCP) (364' U17) 1FIT-0143 (1C RCP) (364' U17)

e. Monitor RCP seal status:

o Computer points o Local seal injection flow Page 17 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 16 CHECK PZR LEVEL :

LEVEL:

a. Check charging flow - INDICATED INDICATED:: a. Establish charging flow using 1CV121.

o 1FI-121B (1PL06J)

IF manual control of o F0128 Charg Pump Disch Hdr 1CV121 is NOT available, Flow THEN locally bypass 1CV121:

1) Open the charging header flow control bypass valve for the running CV pump:

o 1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CV pump room) o 1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CV pump room)

2) Close at least ONE charging header flow control valve manual isolation:

o 1CV8483A (364' +10' U13 CWA) o 1CV8483B (364' +8' U13 CWA)

3) Throttle the charging header flow control bypass valve to maintain PZR level.

Step continued on next page Page 18 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 16 (continued)

4) IF charging flow can NOT be established with 1CV121, THEN perform the following:

a) Locally throttle open one CENT CHG pump to cold leg isolation valve:

o 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) o 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26) b) IF the PZR is NOT being maintained water solid, THEN maintain PZR level between 25% and 31%

31%..

c) GO TO Step 17 (Page 23).

b. Dispatch an operator to bypass 1CV182:

1) Throttle open charging header flow control bypass valve:

1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA P-71)

2) Close charging header flow control manual isolation valves:

1CV8402A (364' V13 CWA P-71) 1CV8402B (364' V13 CWA P-71)

Step continued on next page Page 19 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 16 (continued)

c. Check PZR level - GREATER THAN c. Perform the following:

17%

1) Verify letdown isolation valves closed:

1CV459 1CV460 1CV8149A 1CV8149B 1CV8149C

2) Verify group A and B PZR heaters are OFF.

3) Raise charging flow to restore PZR level to greater than 17%

17%.

4) Continue with Step 17 (Page 23),

WHEN PZR level is greater than 17%

17%,

THEN restore letdown per Step 16d RNO.

Step continued on next page Page 20 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 16 (continued)

d. Check letdown - IN SERVICE SERVICE:: d. IF normal charging is in service, o Letdown orifice isolation THEN perform the following valves - ANY OPEN OPEN:: to restore letdown:

o 1CV8149A 1) Manually open the o 1CV8149B letdown isolation o 1CV8149C valves:

-OR- 1CV459 1CV460 o F0134 Ltdn Hx Ltdn Outlet Flow 2) Manually open the letdown orifice isolation valve(s) to establish 45 GPM GPM:

o 1CV8149A o 1CV8149B o 1CV8149C IF letdown can NOT be restored, THEN perform the following:

1) Verify CC flow to RCP thermal barriers between 150 GPM and 231 GPM (unless previously isolated):

1FIS-685A (383' U18)

2) Locally close charging header flow control bypass valve:

1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA P-71)

Step continued on next page Page 21 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 16 (continued)

3) Throttle 1CV121 to maintain seal injection flow between 6 GPM and 8 GPM per pump to minimize PZR level rise (unless PZR is being maintained water solid):

F0131 RCP 1 Seal Injection Wtr Flow F0129 RCP 2 Seal Injection Wtr Flow F0127 RCP 3 Seal Injection Wtr Flow F0125 RCP 4 Seal Injection Wtr Flow

4) GO TO Step 16f.

e. Check letdown orifice isolation e. Establish at least 45 GPM valves aligned to establish - letdown.

45 GPM LETDOWN LETDOWN::

o 1CV8149A o 1CV8149B o 1CV8149C

f. Check PZR bubble - BEING f. IF pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid PZR, THEN maintain the PZR solid.

GO TO Step 17 (Next Page).

g. Adjust 1CV121 to maintain PZR level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%

Page 22 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 17 CHECK RCP STATUS STATUS::

a. RCPs - AT LEAST ONE RUNNING a. Verify natural circulation:

RCS subcooling acceptable per:

o Computer point X0190, Degrees of Subcooling

-OR-o Iconic Display

-OR-o FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 (Page 48) using:

PZR pressure RCS temperature from RCS hot leg temperature indication SG pressure stable OR dropping.

RCS hot leg temperature stable OR dropping.

Average of ten highest core exit TCs stable OR dropping per:

o Computer point X0113, Core Exit T Avg 10 Hottest

-OR-o Iconic Display RCS cold leg temperature at saturation for SG pressure.

IF natural circulation can NOT be verified, THEN dump more steam from SGs.

Page 23 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 18 CHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORS SHOULD BE ENERGIZED ENERGIZED::

a. IR current - LESS THAN a. Continue with Step 19 10-10 AMPS AMPS:: (Next Page),

WHEN IR current is less 1NI-NR003 (N35) than 10-10 AMPS AMPS,,

1NI-NR004 (N36) THEN do Step 18b.

b. SR detectors - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:: b. Verify P10 AND P6 reset by checking the following 1NI-NR001 (N31) computer points indicate 1NI-NR002 (N32) RESET:

ND0011 Nucl Pwr 1 RE TR P10 Part Perm ND0012 Nucl Pwr 2 RE TR P10 Part Perm ND0013 Nucl Pwr 3 RE TR P10 Part Perm ND0014 Nucl Pwr 4 RE TR P10 Part Perm ND0032 Interm Rng 1 RE TR P6 Part Block ND0033 Interm Rng 2 RE TR P6 Part Block IF P10 OR P6 are NOT RESET, THEN reset per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61).

Page 24 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 19 MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT CONDITIONS CONDITIONS::

a. Check controlled cooldown and a. GO TO Step 19c.

depressurization - NOT PREVIOUSLY IN PROGRESS

b. Maintain RCS Tave - BETWEEN 550 550F AND 561 561F

c. Check PZR bubble - BEING c. IF pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid PZR, THEN throttle 1CV121 to control PZR pressure.

GO TO Step 19f.

d. Maintain PZR pressure - BETWEEN 2220 PSIG AND 2260 PSIG

e. Maintain PZR level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%

f. Maintain SG wide range levels -

BETWEEN 65% AND 70%

g. Check VCT level - LESS THAN 95% g. Perform the following:

1) Verify primary water pump 0A and boric acid transfer pump are OFF.

2) Contact UNIT 2 to verify primary water pump 0B is OFF.

h. Check current RCS boron h. Borate until shutdown sample - GREATER THAN SHUTDOWN margin requirements are MARGIN REQUIREMENT per: met.

1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN MARGIN VERIFICATION DURING SHUTDOWN

i. Complete applicable actions of 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN Step continued on next page Page 25 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 19 (continued)

j. Dispatch operators to complete shutdown procedures for tripped FW pumps and HD pumps

k. Dispatch an operator to prop open room door for running CENT CHG pump - IF NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN ROOM TEMPERATURE NORMAL

l. STA implement Status Tree monitoring for both units 20 CHECK RCFC STATUS STATUS:

a. RCFCs - AT LEAST ONE RUNNING IN a. Manually start ONE RCFC.

HI SPEED IF NO RCFCs can be manually started, THEN locally start at least ONE RCFC:

1) Verify ALL RCFC LO speed breakers are OPEN OPEN:

Bus 131X 4C (1A RCFC)

Bus 131X 2C (1C RCFC)

Bus 132X 4C (1B RCFC)

Bus 132X 2C (1D RCFC)

2) Close the HI speed breaker for at least ONE RCFC:

Bus 131X 5C (1A RCFC)

Bus 131X 3C (1C RCFC)

Bus 132X 5C (1B RCFC)

Bus 132X 3C (1D RCFC) 21 CHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANS FANS:

a. Exhaust fans - RUNNING RUNNING:

a. Manually start the fans.

1VP03CA 1VP03CB 1VP03CC 1VP03CD Page 26 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 22 CHECK CST LEVEL INDICATION INDICATION::

a. Check CST level indication - a. Perform the following:

AVAILABLE AVAILABLE::

1) Crosstie U-1 CST to U-2 o 0PL01J RADWASTE ROOM CST per BwOP CD-2, o 0PL11J MUDS RAISING CST LEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BY CROSSTYING

2) Monitor U-1 CST level on U-2 CST level indication:

2LI-CD051B (0PL01J) 2LI-CD051C (0PL11J) 23 DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT STATUS STATUS::

a. Shift Manager determines: a. RETURN TO Step 13 (Page 9).

o Hot Shutdown - DESIRED o Cold Shutdown - DESIRED Page 27 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ CAUTION PZR pressure may drop rapidly during cooldown if the RCS is water solid.

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

NOTE *

SG wide range level is cold *

calibrated. As SG temperature *

drops, wide range indicated level *

must be raised to maintain actual *

level constant.

24 INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350 F:

350

a. Check Shutdown Margin - a. Borate until Shutdown ADEQUATE FOR HOT SHUTDOWN per: Margin requirements are met.

1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN WHEN shutdown margin MARGIN DAILY VERIFICATION requirements are met, DURING SHUTDOWN. THEN continue with Step 24b.

b. Stop all but one RCP

c. Maintain cooldown rate in RCS cold legs - LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 50 50F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD

d. Maintain RCS temperature and pressure per 1BwOSR 3.4.3.1, RCS PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCE

e. Dump steam using SG PORVs e. Locally open SG PORVs per BwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATION OF THE SG PORVs.

f. Control AF flow to maintain ALL f. Locally fail air and SG wide range levels - BETWEEN throttle the 1AF005 flow 65% AND 70% control valves.

(364' P10 HANDWHEELS)

Page 28 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 25 DEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIG :

PSIG:

a. Turn Group A and B PZR a. Locally open 480 volt feed heaters - OFF breaker(s):

o Group A:

Bus 1RY01EA Cub B2 (414' S12 CWA) o Group B:

Bus 1RY01EB Cub B2 (426' S12 CWA)

b. Locally open 480 volt feed breakers to PZR heater groups C and D:

Group C:

Bus 1RY01EC Cub B2 (426' S12 CWA)

Group D:

Bus 1RY01ED Cub B2 (414' S12 CWA)

c. Check PZR bubble - BEING c. Perform the following:

MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL

1) Depressurize by reducing charging flow.

2) GO TO Step 25f.

d. Monitor PZR spray water temperature differential per 1BwOS TRM 3.4.c.1, PRESSURIZER TEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCE Step continued on next page Page 29 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 25 (continued)

e. Depressurize RCS using PZR aux e. IF PZR aux spray can NOT spray: be used, THEN depressurize using a

1) Check letdown - IN SERVICE PZR PORV:

2) Check PZR spray water 1) Contact Electrical differential - LESS THAN Maintenance to repair a 320 320F: PZR PORV per MA-BR-726-633, T0126 Regen HX Charg Out T INSTALLATION OF T0481 PZR Steam T POST-FIRE COLD SHUTDOWN EMERGENCY CABLE.

3) Open PZR aux spray valve:

2) Depressurize using the 1CV8145 repaired PZR PORV:

o 1RY455A o 1RY456

f. Check RCS pressure - LESS THAN f. RETURN TO Step 25c 1880 PSIG (Previous Page).

g. Stop depressurization:

o Close PZR aux spray valve o Close PZR PORV

h. Maintain 1880 PSIG using:

o PZR heaters o PZR aux spray o Charging flow o PZR PORV Page 30 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 26 BLOCK SI ACTUATIONS :

ACTUATIONS: RETURN TO Step 22 (Page 27).

a. Block following SI signals per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):

PZR LOW PRESS SI STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI

b. Verify SI signals blocked:

Computer points indicate -

SET SET::

PD0495 PZR LO P SI TRN A Block PD0496 PZR LO P SI TRN B Block PD0570 SG LO STM LINE P SI TRN 1 BLOK PD0571 SG LO STM LINE P SI TRN 2 BLOK Page 31 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 27 CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN AND DEPRESSURIZATION DEPRESSURIZATION: :

a. Determine RCS wide range a. Locally align pressure pressure from process computer indicator 1PI-PS298 (HRSS points: panel 1PS25J) to EITHER of the following:

o P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV o P0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch II o PZR steam sample line:

o P0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch I o P0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch III a) Open PZR steam inlet isolation valve:

1PS9350A (HRSS panel 1PS27J) b) Open valve 1.1 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)

-OR-o PZR liquid sample line:

a) Open PZR liquid inlet isolation valve:

1PS9350B (HRSS panel 1PS27J) b) Open valve 1.2 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)

IF NO RCS pressure indication is available, THEN contact Electrical Maintenance to repair a wide range RCS pressure transmitter:

o 1PI-403 o 1PI-405

b. Maintain RCS cooldown rate -

LESS THAN 50 50F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD

c. Verify ALL PZR heaters - OFF Step continued on next page Page 32 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 27 (continued)

d. Continue depressurization:

o Open PZR aux spray valve:

1CV8145 o Open repaired PZR PORV

e. Check PZR bubble - BEING e. IF pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid PZR, THEN maintain the PZR solid.

GO TO Step 27g.

f. Maintain PZR level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%

g. Complete applicable actions of 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN Page 33 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ CAUTION SI accumulators should be isolated when RCS pressure is between 1000 PSIG and 800 PSIG PSIG.

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º 28 CHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULD BE ISOLATED ISOLATED::

a. RCS pressure - LESS THAN a. Continue with Step 29 1000 PSIG (Next Page),

WHEN RCS pressure is less than 1000 PSIG PSIG,,

THEN do Steps 28b thru 28c.

b. Close SI accumulator discharge valves:

Train A (1SI8808A and D):

a) Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT b) Locally close SI b) Close SI accumulator accumulator discharge discharge valve(s):

valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF o 1SI8808A (412' R15 SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT OMB) o 1SI8808D (412' R9 MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A) OMB)

(414' S12 CWA)

MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)

(414' S12 CWA)

Train B (1SI8808B and C):

a) Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT b) Locally close SI b) Close SI accumulator accumulator discharge discharge valve(s):

valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF o 1SI8808B (412' R18 SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT OMB) o 1SI8808C (412' R5 MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B) OMB)

(426' S12 CWA)

MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)

(426' S12 CWA)

Page 34 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 29 CHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION CAN BE PLACED IN SERVICE SERVICE: :

a. RCS temperature - LESS THAN a. Continue to cooldown, 380 380F WHEN RCS temperature is less than 380 F, 380 THEN do Step 29b.

b. Place Cold Overpressure b. Refer to Tech Spec 3.4.12.

Protection in service per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) 30 CHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BE LOCKED OUT OUT:

a. RCS temperature - LESS THAN a. RETURN TO Step 27 350 350F (Page 32).

b. Locally rack out breakers for the following ECCS equipment:

BOTH SI pumps:

Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)

Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)

Non-running CV pump:

o Bus 141 Cub 11 (CV pump 1A) o Bus 142 Cub 10 (CV pump 1B)

Page 35 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 31 MAINTAIN STABLE PLANT CONDITIONS CONDITIONS::

a. RCS average temperature - LESS THAN 350 F 350

b. RCS pressure - BETWEEN 330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG

c. Check PZR bubble - BEING c. IF pressure is being MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solid PZR, THEN throttle 1CV121 to control PZR pressure.

GO TO Step 31e.

d. PZR level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%

e. SG wide range levels - BETWEEN 65% AND 70%

f. Check VCT level - LESS THAN 95% f. Perform the following:

1) Verify primary water pump 0A and boric acid transfer pump are OFF.

2) Contact UNIT 2 to verify primary water pump 0B is OFF.

g. Complete applicable actions of 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN 32 DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANT STATUS STATUS::

a. Shift Manager determines - COLD a. RETURN TO Step 31.

SHUTDOWN DESIRED Page 36 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

NOTE *

Cooldown on SGs is preferable to RH *

cooldown due to lack of RH controls *

and indications at the RSP.

33 CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200 200F:

a. Check Shutdown Margin - a. Borate until Shutdown ADEQUATE FOR COLD SHUTDOWN per per:

Margin requirements are met.

1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN WHEN shutdown margin MARGIN VERIFICATION DURING requirements are met, SHUTDOWN THEN continue with Step 33b.

b. Maintain RCS pressure - BETWEEN 330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG

c. Continue to cool down with SG PORVs

d. Check RCS temperature - d. Align SG blowdown to DROPPING control RCS temperature.

IF sufficient cooldown can NOT be obtained with SG PORVs AND SG blowdown, THEN GO TO Step 34 (Next Page).

e. RETURN TO Step 32 (Previous Page)

Page 37 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 34 ALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLING :

SAMPLING:

a. RH pumps - NONE RUNNING IN a. GO TO Step 38b (Page 45).

SHUTDOWN COOLING MODE

b. Refer to BwOP RH-5, RH SYSTEM STARTUP FOR RECIRC, for applicable actions

c. Verify RH hot leg suctions c. Locally verify RH pump hot isolated from RCS by checking leg suction valves are RH suction pressure - AT LEAST CLOSED CLOSED::

50 PSIG LESS THAN RCS WIDE RANGE PRESSURE PRESSURE:: 1RH8701A (377' R7 OMB P-68)

RH suction pressure: 1RH8702A (377' R4 OMB P-75) o Computer points: 1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB near "D" loop against Rx P0601 RH Pump 1A Suct cavity wall)

Press 1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB P0602 RH Pump 1B Suct near "C" loop against Rx Press cavity wall) o Local gauge pressure:

1PI-0601 (RH Pump 1A)

(346' V16) 1PI-0602 (RH Pump 1B)

(346' W15)

-AND-RCS wide range pressure:

o Computer points:

o P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV o P0492 RCS Wide RnG Ch II o Local gauge pressure:

o 1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J) (377' R1) o 1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J) (377' R11)

Step continued on next page Page 38 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 34 (continued)

d. Locally check RH pump miniflow d. Locally open any closed valves - OPEN :

OPEN: valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF 1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

of 1A RH HX Room) 1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner o MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610) of 1B RH HX Room) o MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)

e. Locally check containment e. Locally close any open recirc sump valves - CLOSED CLOSED:: valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF 1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA) SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA) o MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A) o MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)

f. Locally check RH HX to CV and f. Locally close any open SI pumps isolation valves - valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, CLOSED CLOSED:

LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

1CV8804A (364' S13 CWA) 1SI8804B (364' Y13 above 1B o MCC 131X1 J5 (1CV8804A)

SI pump) o MCC 132X4 E1 (1SI8804B)

g. Locally check CS sump suction g. Locally close any open valves - CLOSED CLOSED:

valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF 1CS009A (1A CS pump room) SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

1CS009B (1B CS pump room) o MCC 131X1 C1 (1CS009A) o MCC 132X1 G1 (1CS009B)

h. Locally check RWST to RH pump h. Locally open any closed outlet isolation valves - OPEN OPEN:

valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm) SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm) o MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A) o MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)

Step continued on next page Page 39 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 34 (continued)

i. Install pneumatic i. RETURN TO Step 32 jumper/regulator to bypass (Page 36).

signal converters for selected RH flow control valves per ATTACHMENT C (Page 57):

o RH Pump 1A:

1RH606 1RH618 o RH Pump 1B:

1RH607 1RH619

j. Locally close selected RH train j. RETURN TO Step 32 HX flow control valve using (Page 36).

pneumatic jumper/regulator:

o 1RH606 o 1RH607

k. Locally verify selected RH k. Close valve using train HX bypass flow control pneumatic valve - CLOSED CLOSED:: jumper/regulator.

o 1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH HX Room) o 1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH HX Room)

l. Separate RH trains:

Locally close RH discharge Open the breaker and header crosstie valve using separate RH trains by 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY locally closing using CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN the handwheel:

EQUIPMENT, for train NOT being recirced: o 1RH8716A (364' +11' S14 CWA) o MCC 131X1 F3 (1RH8716A) o 1RH8716B o MCC 132X4 A4 (1RH8716B) (364' +11' U14 CWA)

Page 40 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 35 LOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM IN OPERATION FOR SAMPLING SAMPLING: :

a. Start the selected RH pump a. Continue cooldown on SG using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL PORVs, EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE RETURN TO Step 33 SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT (Page 37).

b. Shift Manager determines recirc flowpath:

o Miniflow:

Maintain RH flow - GREATER THAN 500 GPM GPM:

o F0601 RHR Pump 1A Minflow o F0602 RHR Pump 1B Minflow

-OR-o Back to RWST:

a) Obtain key for 1RH8735 b) Unlock and open 1RH8735 (364' +11' S13) c) Adjust RH bypass flow control valve to obtain -

3300 GPM GPM::

o 1RH618:

F0626 RHX 1 Coolant Disch F o 1RH619:

F0627 RHX 2 Coolant Disch F

c. Contact Chemistry for boron samples:

RCS Operating RH train

d. Locally stop running RH pump per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT Page 41 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 36 ALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWN COOLING COOLING::

a. Align CC for shutdown cooling per BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CC BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2

b. Locally open RH HX CC return b. Open the breaker and valve for selected RH train per locally open the valve 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY using the handwheel:

CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: o 1CC9412A (364' +10' S17) o 1CC9412B (364' +12' V18) o 1MCC 131X1 K3 (1CC9412A) o 1MCC 132X1 D4 (1CC9412B)

Page 42 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 37 ALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FOR SHUTDOWN COOLING COOLING:

a. Refer to BwOP RH-6, PLACING THE RH SYSTEM IN SHUTDOWN COOLING, for applicable actions

b. Check RCS pressure - LESS THAN b. Depressurize RCS to 360 PSIG PSIG:

less than 360 PSIG PSIG..

o Computer points:

o P0498 RCL System WR LP 3 P o P0499 RCL System WR LP 1 P o Local gauge pressure:

o 1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J)

(377' R1) o 1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J)

(377' R11)

c. Close RH pump suction from RWST:

1) Energize SVAG VALVE MCC per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT

2) Locally close RH pump suction 2) Open the breaker and from RWST valve using 1BwOA locally close the valve ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY using the handwheel:

CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: o 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm) o MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A) o 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump o MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B) Rm)

Step continued on next page Page 43 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 37 (continued)

d. Locally open RCS hot leg to RH d. Open the breaker and pump suction valves using 1BwOA locally open the valves ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL using the handwheels:

OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

o RH Pump 1A: o RH Pump 1A:

MCC 131X2 B1 (1RH8701A) 1RH8701A MCC 132X2 B3 (1RH8701B) (377' R7 OMB P-68) 1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB near "D" loop against Rx cavity wall) o RH Pump 1B: o RH Pump 1B:

MCC 131X2 B4 (1RH8702A) 1RH8702A MCC 132X2 B1 (1RH8702B) (377' R4 OMB P-75) 1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB near "C" loop against Rx cavity wall)

e. Locally verify RH pump miniflow e. Locally open the valve valve - OPEN OPEN:: using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE o 1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

of 1A RH HX Room) o 1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner o MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610) of 1B RH HX Room) o MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)

f. Locally verify RH HX flow f. Close the valve using control valve - CLOSED CLOSED:: pneumatic jumper/regulator.

o 1RH606 (357' +10' S16 1A RH HX Room) o 1RH607 (357' +10' V16 1B RH HX Room)

g. Locally verify RH HX bypass g. Close the valve using flow control valve - CLOSED CLOSED:: pneumatic jumper/regulator.

o 1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH HX Room) o 1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH HX Room)

Page 44 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 38 PLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN IN OPERATION FOR COOLDOWN COOLDOWN:

a. Locally start RH pump using a. Continue cooldown using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY SG PORVs, CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN RETURN TO Step 33 EQUIPMENT (Page 37).

b. Locally establish cooldown:

Throttle RH HX bypass flow control valve using temporary regulator to maintain RH flow - GREATER THAN 3300 GPM GPM:

o 1RH618:

F0626 RHX 1 Coolant Disch F o 1RH619:

F0627 RHX 2 Coolant Disch F Throttle RH HX flow control valve using temporary regulator to maintain RCS cooldown rate - LESS THAN 50 50F IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD PERIOD:

o 1RH606 o 1RH607 Page 45 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 39 ESTABLISH RH LETDOWN AT DISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGER MANAGER:

a. Refer to BwOP CV-17, ESTABLISHING AND SECURING NORMAL AND RH LETDOWN FLOW, for applicable actions

b. Check letdown isolation b. Manually open the valves - OPEN OPEN:

valve(s).

1CV459 1CV460

c. Check letdown orifice isolation c. Manually open the valves - OPEN OPEN:

valve(s).

1CV8149A 1CV8149B 1CV8149C

d. Obtain key from RSP and locally open RH HX outlet to CV letdown HX isolation valve for selected train:

o 1RH8734A (364' S14 CWA 25' West of door) o 1RH8734B (364' V14 CWA 6' East of door)

e. Locally open RH to CV letdown valve using a pneumatic jumper:

1CV128 (383' U15 1B letdown HX valve room)

Step continued on next page Page 46 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 39 (continued)

f. Locally adjust letdown to maintain PZR level:

1) Monitor charging and letdown flow on computer points:

o F0134 Letdown Hx Letdown Outlet F o F0128 Charg Pmp Disch Hdr F

2) Adjust 1CV131 manual bypass as necessary when establishing letdown:

1CV8409 (364' +29' S13 CWA)

3) Locally isolate 1CV131 by closing its manual isolation valves:

o 1CV8408A (364' +29' S13 CWA) o 1CV8408B (364' +29' S13 CWA)

g. Locally close letdown line containment isolation valve:

Fail air to 1CV8152 (364'

+27' X13 CWA P-41) 40 PROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWN CONDITION PER PER::

1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN

-END-Page 47 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 RCS Pressure (PSIG) 2600 2400 2200 ACCEPTABLE 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 NOT 1000 ACCEPTABLE 800 Containment 600 Conditions:

400 Normal---

---Saturation 200 0

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 RCS Temperature (°F)

FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 RCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN Page 48 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4)

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ CAUTION Switching control to LOCAL may result in unwanted OR unexpected equipment operation if RSP control switch positions do NOT match current equipment conditions.

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º 1 PLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCAL LOCAL:

a. Dispatch an NSO with the key to 1PL05JA (364' M23) to place the following switches in - LOCAL LOCAL:

EPN EQUIPMENT 0VC01CB MCR SUPPLY FAN 0B

- 0VC02CB 0VC02CB MCR RETURN FAN 0B 0VC02Y, 3Y, 4Y MCR EXH, RETURN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS

- 0VC05Y, 0VC05Y, 6Y, 44Y RECIRC CHAR ABSORB INLT, OUTLT, BYP DAMPERS

- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.

Page 49 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT A (PG 2 OF 4)

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP 2 PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04J 1PL04J:

EPN EQUIPMENT 0VC01CA MCR SUPPLY FAN 0A

- 0VC02CA 0VC02CA MCR RETURN FAN 0A 0VC18Y, 19Y, 20Y MCR EXH, RETURN, OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS

- 0VC21Y, 0VC21Y, 22Y, 43Y RECIRC CHAR ABSORB INLT, OUTLT, BYP DAMPERS

- 1MS001A 1MS001A & 1MS001D MSIV 1A & 1D CONTROL

- 1AF005A 1AF005A SG 1A FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013A SG 1A ISOL VLV 1AF01PA AF PUMP 1A

- 1AF005B 1AF005B SG 1B FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013B SG 1B ISOL VLV 1CV01PA CENT CHG PUMP 1A

- 1AF005C 1AF005C SG 1C FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013C SG 1C ISOL VLV 1VP01CA RCFC 1A HIGH SPEED

- 1AF005D 1AF005D SG 1D FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013D SG 1D ISOL VLV 1VP01CC RCFC 1C HIGH SPEED

- 1MS018A 1MS018A SG 1A PORV 1CC01PA CC PUMP 1A

- 1MS018D 1MS018D SG 1D PORV 0CC01P CC PUMP 0 1SX01PA SX PUMP 1A

- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.

Page 50 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT A (PG 3 OF 4)

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP 3 PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05J 1PL05J::

EPN EQUIPMENT

- 1MS001B 1MS001B & 1MS001C MSIV 1B & 1C CONTROL

- 1AF005E 1AF005E SG 1A FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013E SG 1A ISOL VLV 1AF01PB AF PUMP 1B

- 1AF005F 1AF005F SG 1B FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013F SG 1B ISOL VLV 1CV01PB CENT CHG PUMP 1B

- 1AF005G 1AF005G SG 1C FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013G SG 1C ISOL VLV 1VP01CB RCFC 1B HIGH SPEED

- 1AF005H 1AF005H SG 1D FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013H SG 1D ISOL VLV 1VP01CD RCFC 1D HIGH SPEED

- 1MS018B 1MS018B SG 1B PORV 1CC01PB CC PUMP 1B

- 1MS018C 1MS018C SG 1C PORV 0CC01P CC PUMP 0 1SX01PB SX PUMP 1B 1CV8104 EMER BORATION VALVE

- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.

Page 51 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT A (PG 4 OF 4)

REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP 4 PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06J 1PL06J::

EPN EQUIPMENT

- 1VP03CA 1VP03CA CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1A

- 1VP03CB 1VP03CB CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1B

- 1VP03CC 1VP03CC CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1C

- 1VP03CD 1VP03CD CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1D

- 1CV8149A 1CV8149A 45 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE

- 1CV460 1CV460 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 0PW02PA PW MAKEUP PUMP 0A

- 1CV8149B 1CV8149B 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE

- 1CV459 1CV459 LETDOWN LINE ISOL

- 1AB03P 1AB03P AB XFER PUMP 1

- 1CV8149C 1CV8149C 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE PZR B/U HEATER GRP A CONTACTOR PZR B/U HEATER GRP A BREAKER

- 1CV8145 1CV8145 PZR AUX SPRAY VALVE PZR B/U HEATER GRP B CONTACTOR PZR B/U HEATER GRP B BREAKER

- Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position.

NOTE *

When in "LOCAL" the charging flow *

controller provides a direct air *

signal to the 1CV121 valve *

controller.

5 CONTROL CHARGING FLOW FLOW:

a. Place charging flow control in - LOCAL LOCAL:

1FHC-121 6 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)

-END-Page 52 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 4)

LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS

NOTE *

Vital area keys will be available at *

the Remote Shutdown Panel for entry *

through doors with disabled card *

readers.

1 LOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD VENT VALVES VALVES:

Open circuit breaker 9 on DC Bus 113, Cub ER1:

1RC014A 1RC014C Open circuit breaker 10 on DC Bus 114, Cub ER1:

1RC014B 1RC014D 2 LOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIP Open the breakers.

BREAKERS OPEN 3 LOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVES CLOSED CLOSED::

Governor valves Throttle valves Reheat stop valves Intercept valves 4 VERIFY PUMPS TRIPPED TRIPPED:: Locally open breaker(s).

HD Pump 1B (Bus 156 Cub 3)

FW Pump 1A (Bus 156 Cub 4)

HD Pump 1A (Bus 157 Cub 3)

HD Pump 1C (Bus 157 Cub 5)

Startup FW Pump (Bus 159 Cub 4)

Page 53 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 4)

LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS 5 VERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPED TRIPPED:

a. Locally check PMG output a. Open the breaker.

breaker - OPEN OPEN:

41 breaker (426' J4 at 1MP09E) 6 VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES BUSES:

Locally restore at least ONE 4KV ESF bus per:

ESF buses - BOTH ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:

1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV Bus 141 ESF BUS:

Bus 142 o ATTACHMENT B (1A DG) o ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)

Page 54 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 4)

LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS

NOTE *

Bus status report should include *

breaker positions, control power *

status, and any dropped relays.

7 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT::

a. Disable auto start of CS pump 1A:

1) Pull control power fuses:

Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)

2) Check CS pump breaker - OPEN OPEN:

2) Open breakers with a reach rod.

Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)

b. Report status of SI pump breakers and CS pump breakers to RSP:

Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)

Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)

c. Report status of Train A 4KV busses and breakers to RSP:

Bus 141 Bus 143 Page 55 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 4)

LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS 8 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT::

a. Disable auto start of CS pump 1B:

1) Pull control power fuses:

Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)

2) Check CS pump breaker - OPEN OPEN:

2) Open breakers with a reach rod.

Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)

b. Report status of SI pump breakers and CS pump breakers to RSP:

Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)

Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)

c. Report status of Train B 4KV busses and breakers to RSP:

Bus 142 Bus 144 9 VERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPED TRIPPED:: Locally trip pump(s).

FW Pump 1B FW Pump 1C 10 LOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FW VALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIED CLOSED FROM THE MCR 11 REPORT STATUS OF DIESEL GENERATORS TO RSP RSP:

1A DG 1B DG

-END-Page 56 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 1)

INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS 1 INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERS JUMPERS::

a. Obtain the selected pneumatic jumper and regulator from the RSP cabinet.

b. Back regulator out to zero.

c. Isolate the instrument air supply to the installed regulator and I/P converter.

d. Connect temporary pneumatic jumper and regulator as shown in the drawing below.

e. Unisolate instrument air supply and throttle valves as directed

-END-Page 57 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 3)

RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM 1 VERIFY MCR HABITABLE HABITABLE:

RETURN TO procedure and step in effect.

Contact brigade leader to verify - INITIATING CONDITION HAS CLEARED Contact Rad Protection to verify - SAMPLES INDICATE MCR ATMOSPHERE SAFE FOR HABITATION 2 ESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNING MANNING:

a. Phone security shift supervisor at X-2829 to perform the following:

1) Enable card readers into MCR:

Door 505 Door 507 Door 511 Door 512

2) Establish Main Security Control Room manning

b. Establish normal MCR manning using additional operators while maintaining current remote control station manning 3 ESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN MCR AND RSP 4 EVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOST CONTROLS CONTROLS::

a. Determine capability of MCR for plant control

b. Check MCR indications and b. IF ANY controls are controls - ALL AVAILABLE damaged, THEN maintain remote operation of that control.

Page 58 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT D (PG 2 OF 3)

RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM 5 TRANSFER CONTROL TO MCRMCR::

a. Review logs for all local actions taken

b. Restore indications to MCR by placing Fire Hazards Panel switches to - NORMAL

c. Transfer controls listed in ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) back to MCR - ONE AT A TIME TIME::

1) Verify MCR switch position -

MATCHES RSP SWITCH POSITION

2) Place LOCAL/REMOTE switch at RSP in - REMOTE

d. Place charging flow controller in - REMOTE REMOTE::

1FHC-121 6 CHECK JUMPER STATUS STATUS:

a. All jumpers - REMOVED a. Initiate Temp Configuration Change paperwork for jumpers remaining installed.

7 LOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEAD VENT VALVES VALVES:

Close circuit breaker 9 on DC Bus 113, Cub ER1:

1RC014A 1RC014C Close circuit breaker 10 on DC Bus 114, Cub ER1:

1RC014B 1RC014D Page 59 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT D (PG 3 OF 3)

RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM 8 VERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPs COMPLETED COMPLETED::

o 1BwGP 100-4, POWER DESCENSION o 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND COOLDOWN

-END-Page 60 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET

NOTE *

Some jumpers will be left installed, *

while other jumpers are only *

momentarily installed. Temporary *

Configuration Change paperwork *

should be initiated for any jumpers *

left installed.

1 DETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLE ACCESSIBLE:

a. Obtain status report:

o Fire Brigade Leader o Rad Protection

b. AEER determined to be - b. Contact the Shift Manager ACCESSIBLE for recovery options.

RETURN TO procedure and step effect.

2 OBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT::

Obtain keys to ESF cabinets:

1PA09J Train A 1PA10J Train B 1PA27J Train A 1PA28J Train B Obtain jumpers from cabinet at Remote Shutdown Panel or MCR:

Determine from functions in Step 3 (Next Page) the number of jumpers required Obtain necessary safety equipment:

o SCBAs o Lights o Turnout Gear Page 61 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 2 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 3 PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S)

FUNCTION(S):

o To reset SI, GO TO Step 4 (Page 64) o To block PZR LOW PRESSURE SI, GO TO Step 5 (Page 65) o To block STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI, GO TO Step 6 (Page 66) o To reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE A, GO TO Step 7 (Page 67) o To reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE B, GO TO Step 8 (Page 68) o To reset CONTAINMENT SPRAY actuation, GO TO Step 9 (Page 69) o To reset CONTAINMENT VENT ISOLATION, GO TO Step 10 (Page 70) o To reset NUCLEAR AT POWER PERMISSIVE P10, GO TO Step 11 (Page 71) o To reset SOURCE RANGE PERMISSIVE P6, GO TO Step 12 (Page 72)

Step continued on next page Page 62 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 3 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET Step 3 (continued) o To place COLD OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION in service, GO TO Step 13 (Page 73) o To reset SI RECIRC SUMPS, GO TO Step 14 (Page 74) o To reset CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONS, GO TO Step 15 (Page 75)

Page 63 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 4 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 4 RESET SI SI::

a. Verify Reactor Trip Breakers -

OPEN (P4 actuated)

b. Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install TWO jumpers per train to - RESET RESET::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 (Unlatches slave relays)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 (Unlatches slave relays)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

c. Check relays on affected c. Perform the following:

train(s) - DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED:

1) Remove jumper from K602 TB644.

K603 K604 2) Contact Maintenance to K608 manually reset any K609 energized relays per K610 Step 16 (Page 76).

K611 K630 3) Remove jumper from TB505.

4) GO TO Step 4e.

d. Remove jumpers

e. Check if other ESF manual e. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

f. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 64 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 5 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 5 BLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SI SI:

a. Verify RCS pressure - LESS THAN 1930 PSIG

b. Install jumper(s) across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install ONE jumper per train to - BLOCK BLOCK::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

c. Check K628 relay(s) - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:

c. Notify Maintenance to jumper slave relay K628-6 o Train A (1PA09J) to cabinet ground.

o Train B (1PA10J)

d. Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLED

e. Check if other ESF manual e. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

f. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 65 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 6 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 6 BLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SI SI:

a. Verify RCS pressure - LESS THAN 1930 PSIG

b. Install jumper(s) across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install ONE jumper per train to - BLOCK BLOCK::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

c. Check K628 relay(s) - ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:

c. Notify Maintenance to jumper slave relay K628-6 o Train A (1PA09J) to cabinet ground.

o Train B (1PA10J)

d. Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLED

e. Check if other ESF manual e. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

f. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 66 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 7 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 7 RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE A A::

a. Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install TWO jumpers per train to - RESET RESET::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

b. Check relays on affected b. Perform the following:

train(s) - DEENERGIZED :

DEENERGIZED:

1) Remove jumper from K605 TB644.

K606 K607 2) Contact Maintenance to K612 manually reset any K613 energized relays per K614 Step 16 (Page 76).

3) Remove jumper from TB504.

4) GO TO Step 7d.

c. Remove jumpers

d. Check if other ESF manual d. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

e. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 67 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 8 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 8 RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION PHASE B B::

a. Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install TWO jumpers per train to - RESET RESET::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

b. Check relays on affected b. Perform the following:

train(s) - DEENERGIZED :

DEENERGIZED:

1) Remove jumper from K618 TB644.

K626

2) Contact Maintenance to manually reset any energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).

3) Remove jumper from TB505.

4) GO TO Step 8d.

c. Remove jumpers

d. Check if other ESF manual d. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

e. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 68 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 9 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 9 RESET CONTAINMENT SPRAY ACTUATION ACTUATION::

a. Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install TWO jumpers per train to - RESET RESET:

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 (Resets Cnmt spray signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 (Resets Cnmt spray signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

b. Check relays on affected b. Perform the following:

train(s) - DEENERGIZED :

DEENERGIZED:

1) Remove jumper from K643 TB644.

K644

2) Contact Maintenance to manually reset any energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).

3) Remove jumper from TB504.

4) GO TO Step 9d.

c. Remove jumpers

d. Check if other ESF manual d. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

e. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 69 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 10 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 10 RESET CONTAINMENT VENT ISOLATION ISOLATION::

a. Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install TWO jumpers per train to - RESET RESET:

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 (Resets Cnmt Vent signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 (Resets Cnmt Vent signal)

Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 (Unlatches slave relay)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

b. Check relays on affected b. Perform the following:

train(s) - DEENERGIZED :

DEENERGIZED:

1) Remove jumper from K615 TB644.

K622

2) Contact Maintenance to manually reset any energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).

3) Remove jumper from TB504.

4) GO TO Step 10d.

c. Remove jumpers

d. Check if other ESF manual d. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

e. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 70 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 11 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 11 RESET NUCLEAR AT POWER PERMISSIVE P10 P10:

a. Install jumpers across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install SIX jumpers per train to - RESET RESET::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

b. Check K629 relay(s) - b. Notify Maintenance to lift DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED:: and tape slave relay K629-6.

o Train A (1PA09J) o Train B (1PA10J)

c. Leave jumpers - INSTALLED

d. Check if other ESF manual d. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

e. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 71 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 12 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 12 RESET SOURCE RANGE PERMISSIVE P6 P6::

a. Check P10 - RESET RESET:

a. Reset P10 per Step 11 (Previous Page).

Check relay K629 -

DEENERGIZED

b. Lift TWO leads per train to -

RESET RESET::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 (Simulates N35 less than 5x10-11 AMPS)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 (Simulates N36 less than 5x10-11 AMPS)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

c. Re-land leads

d. Check if other ESF manual d. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

e. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 72 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 13 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 13 PLACE COLD OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION IN SERVICE SERVICE:

a. Install jumper(s) across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install ONE jumper per train to - PLACE IN SERVICE SERVICE::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Cabinet - 1PA27J Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB916 point 11

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Cabinet - 1PA28J Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB916 point 11

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

b. Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLED

c. Check if other ESF manual c. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

d. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 73 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 14 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 14 RESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATION VALVES VALVES::

a. Check SI signal - RESET RESET:

a. Reset SI per Step 4 (Page 64).

K602 relay - UNLATCHED

b. Install jumper(s) across terminal points listed below for Trains A and/or B:

Install ONE jumper per train to - RESET RESET::

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 (1SI8811A will not Auto Open)

(1CV8110 will not Auto Close)

(Allows breaker 1411 closure)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 (1SI8811B will not Auto Open)

(1CV8111 will not Auto Close)

(Allows breaker 1421 closure)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

c. Check K647 relay(s) - c. Perform the following:

DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED::

1) Remove jumper from o Train A (1PA09J) TB656.

o Train B (1PA10J)

2) Contact Maintenance to manually reset any energized relays per Step 16 (Page 76).

3) GO TO Step 14e.

d. Remove jumper(s)

e. Check if other ESF manual e. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

f. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 74 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 15 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET 15 RESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATION VALVES VALVES::

a. Check SI signal- RESET: a. Reset SI per Step 4 (Page 64).

K602 relay - UNLATCHED

b. Install ONE jumper per train to - RESET RESET:

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 (1CV8114 will not Auto Close)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 (1CV8116 will not Auto Close)

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

c. Check K646 relay(s) - c. Perform the following:

DEENERGIZED DEENERGIZED: :

1) Remove jumper from o Train A (1PA09J) TB645.

o Train B (1PA10J)

2) Contact Maintenance to manually reset any energized relays per Step 16 (Next Page).

3) GO TO Step 15e.

d. Remove jumper(s)

e. Check if other ESF manual e. RETURN TO procedure and blocks or resets - REQUIRED step in effect.

f. RETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62)

Page 75 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 16 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET

>>¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥ CAUTION An insulated screwdriver and low voltage gloves are required to perform this step.

¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥¥º

NOTE *

It is acceptable to remove daisy *

chained wires in this step.

16 PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLY RESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYS RELAYS::

o Reset a Westinghouse AR style (box shaped) relay as follows:

1) Tag/Remove wires from two terminals (one will be energized) on latch (topmost) assembly

2) Remove two screws that fasten latch assembly to relay

3) Separate latch assembly from relay

4) Manually reset latch finger to recessed position

5) Reinstall latch assembly

6) Verify latch indicator button is 'Out' (not latched)

7) Restore wiring

8) RETURN TO procedure and step in effect.

Step continued on next page Page 76 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT E (PG 17 OF 17)

ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET Step 16 (continued) o Reset a Potter & Brumfield MDR (cylindrical shaped) relay as follows:

1) Locate armature screw in center of front face of relay

2) Check screwdriver slot - 2) Rotate armature screw ALIGNED WITH EMBOSSED MARKS approximately 30 DEGREES ON RELAY (relay already until armature 'snaps' deenergized) into position with slot aligned to embossed marks.

3) RETURN TO procedure and step in effect.

o Reset a Cutler-Hammer relay as follows:

1) Locate the release lever on the relay

2) Manually move the release lever towards the front of the relay

3) Verify the relay plunger moved in

4) RETURN TO procedure and step in effect.

-END-Page 77 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 1 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 1 CHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SI SI:

a. PZR pressure - LESS THAN a. GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).

1829 PSIG

b. PZR pressure - DROPPING b. GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).

c. Trip RCP(s) as required to stop PZR pressure drop:

o RCP 1D o RCP 1C o RCP 1B o RCP 1A

d. Check if PZR pressure - STILL d. GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).

DROPPING

e. Locally isolate PORV 1RY455A at e. Locally remove the control MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA): power fuses at 1DC10J to fail PORV 1RY455A closed:

1) Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE switch in - LOCAL FU-11 FU-12

2) Close 1RY8000A

f. Check if PZR pressure - STILL f. GO TO Step 2 (Next Page).

DROPPING

g. Locally isolate PORV 1RY456 at g. Locally remove the control MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA): power fuses at 1DC11J to fail PORV 1RY456 closed:

1) Place 1RY8000B LOCAL/REMOTE switch in - LOCAL FU-46 FU-47

2) Close 1RY8000B

h. Locally restore PORV 1RY455A:

1) Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE switch at MCC 131X2B A5 in -

LOCAL

2) Open 1RY8000A Page 78 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 2 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 2 OBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSURE PRESSURE::

a. Determine RCS wide range a. Locally align pressure pressure from process computer indicator 1PI-PS298 (HRSS points: panel 1PS25J) to EITHER of the following:

o P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IV o P0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch II o PZR steam sample line:

o P0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch I o P0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch III a) Open PZR sample containment isolation valves using pneumatic jumpers:

1PS9354A (377' +6' R6 OMB P-70) 1PS9354B (364' +13' V13 P-70 CWA) b) Open PZR steam inlet isolation valve:

1PS9350A (HRSS panel 1PS27J) c) Open valve 1.1 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)

-OR-o PZR liquid sample line:

a) Open PZR sample containment isolation valves using pneumatic jumpers:

1PS9355A (377' +6' R6 OMB P-70) 1PS9355B (364' +13' V13 P-70 CWA) b) Open PZR liquid inlet isolation valve:

1PS9350B (HRSS panel 1PS27J) c) Open valve 1.2 (HRSS Panel 1PS25J)

Page 79 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 3 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 3 CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BE WHEN SI termination criteria TERMINATED TERMINATED:: are met, THEN terminate SI per Steps 4 RCS subcooling - ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE:

thru 17.

o ICONIC DISPLAY

-OR-o Computer point (greater than 30 30F):

X0190 Degrees of Subcooling

-OR-o FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1 (Page 48) using:

RCS pressure from Step 2 (Previous Page)

RCS temperature from RCS hot leg temperature indication RCS Pressure - STABLE OR RISING PZR level - GREATER THAN 4%

4 CHECK SG LEVELS LEVELS:

a. Wide range level - GREATER THAN a. Maintain total feed flow 59% IN ANY SG greater than 500 GPM until wide range level is greater than 59% in at least ONE SG.

b. Maintain wide range level -

BETWEEN 65% AND 70%

Page 80 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 4 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 5 RESET ACTUATIONS ACTUATIONS::

a. Check fire not occurring in a. GO TO ATTACHMENT G either of the following: (Page 86).

o MCR o AEER

b. Check AEER - ACCESSIBLE b. GO TO ATTACHMENT G (Page 86).

c. Reset functions per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):

SI Containment isolation Phase A CV Miniflows SI Recirc Sumps

d. Check automatic SI relay on d. GO TO ATTACHMENT G affected train(s) - UNLATCHED UNLATCHED:: (Page 86).

K602 (1PA09J/10J) 6 RESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TO CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT::

a. Dispatch operators to locally open Instrument Air containment isolation valves using pneumatic jumpers:

1IA065 (391' CWA P-39) 1IA066 (377' +12' R5 OMB P-39) 7 REALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPS PUMPS:

a. Stop all but ONE CV pump and place in standby Page 81 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 5 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 8 ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW MINIFLOW: :

a. Locally check CV pump a. Perform the following:

miniflow - GREATER THAN 60 GPM GPM:

o Open motor operated 1FI-CV048 (346' Q12) miniflow valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

o MCC 131X1 M1 (1CV8110):

1CV8110 (364' S13 CWA) o MCC 132X4 C4 (1CV8111):

1CV8111 (364' S13 CWA) o Open the solenoid valves by pulling fuses:

o Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA27J (1CV8114) o Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA28J (1CV8116) 9 ESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGING CHARGING::

a. Throttle 1CV121 to - 5% OPEN

b. Locally open charging line b. Open the breaker(s) and containment isolation valves locally open valve(s) per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL using the handwheel:

EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: o 1CV8105 (379' CWA P-71) o 1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71) 1CV8105 (MCC 132X4 C3) 1CV8106 (MCC 131X1 K1)

Page 82 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 6 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 10 ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION INJECTION:

a. Locally close charging pumps to a. Open the breaker and cold leg injection isolation locally close the valve(s) valves using 1BwOA ELEC-5, using the handwheel:

LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: o 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) o 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4) 1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4) 11 CONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAIN IF 1CV121 can NOT be PZR LEVEL LEVEL:

controlled, THEN perform the following:

Throttle 1CV121 to maintain PZR level - BETWEEN 25% and 31% a. Locally throttle open one CENT CHG pump to cold leg isolation valve to maintain PZR level:

o 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) o 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)

b. Cycle PZR heater groups A and B to maintain pressure stable.

c. GO TO Step 14 (Page 85).

12 CONTROL PZR PRESSURE :

PRESSURE:

Cycle PZR heater groups A and B to maintain pressure - STABLE Page 83 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 7 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 13 CHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BE ESTABLISHED ESTABLISHED::

a. PZR level - GREATER THAN 17% a. Continue with Step 14 (Next Page),

WHEN PZR level is greater than 17%

17%,

THEN do Step 13b.

b. Establish letdown: b. IF letdown can NOT be restored,

1) Open letdown isolation THEN perform the valves: following:

1CV459 1) Verify CC flow to RCP 1CV460 thermal barriers between 150 GPM and 231 GPM GPM:

2) Locally open letdown line containment isolation valves 1FIS-685A (383' U18) using pneumatic jumpers:

2) Close at least ONE 1CV8152 (364' +27' X13 CWA charging line P-41) containment isolation 1CV8160 (377' +15' R5 OMB valve using 1BwOA P-41) ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN

3) Open letdown orifice EQUIPMENT:

isolation valves - NOT TO EXCEED 120 GPM GPM:

o MCC 132X4 C3 (1CV8105):

o 1CV8149A o 1CV8149B 1CV8105 (379' CWA o 1CV8149C P-71) o MCC 131X1 K1 (1CV8106):

1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71)

3) Throttle 1CV121 to control injection flow while maintaining PZR level less than 90% :

90%:

F0131 RCP 1A Seal Inj Flow F0129 RCP 1B Seal Inj Flow F0127 RCP 1C Seal Inj Flow F0125 RCP 1D Seal Inj Flow Page 84 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT F (PG 8 OF 8)

SI TERMINATION 14 DISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOP ECCS PUMPS PUMPS:

a. Stop ECCS pumps using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

o SI Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 3) o RH Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 4) o SI Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 3) o RH Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 4) 15 RESTORE SEAL RETURN RETURN:

a. Locally open seal water return a. Open the breaker and containment isolation valves locally open the valve(s) using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL using the handwheel:

EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: o 1CV8100 (395' CWA P-28) o 1CV8112 (395' R5 OMB MCC 131X4 A5 (1CV8100) P-28)

MCC 132X2 B4 (1CV8112) 16 CHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULD BE STOPPED STOPPED::

a. Verify 4KV ESF buses - a. Try to restore offsite ENERGIZED BY OFFSITE POWER POWER: : power to ESF buses.

ACB 1412 - CLOSED IF offsite power can NOT ACB 1422 - CLOSED be restored, THEN notify Transmission System Operator to initiate an emergency AC restoration program.

GO TO Step 17.

b. Dispatch operators to stop any unloaded DG and place in standby per BwOP DG-12, DIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWN 17 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12 (Page 8)

-END-Page 85 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT G (PG 1 OF 3)

MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI 1 STOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMP PUMP:

Stop selected pump using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT 2 CHECK RCP STATUS STATUS::

a. RCPs - ANY RUNNING a. GO TO Step 3.

b. Stop all but one RCP 3 ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW MINIFLOW::

a. Locally check CV pump a. Perform the following:

miniflow - GREATER THAN 60 GPM GPM:

o Open motor operated 1FI-CV048 (346' Q12) miniflow valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

o MCC 131X1 M1 (1CV8110):

1CV8110 (364' S13 CWA) o MCC 132X4 C4 (1CV8111):

1CV8111 (364' S13 CWA) o Open the solenoid valves by pulling fuses:

o Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA27J (1CV8114) o Fuses 61 and 62 at 1PA28J (1CV8116)

Page 86 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT G (PG 2 OF 3)

MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI 4 ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION INJECTION:

a. Check CC flow to RCP thermal a. Locally establish CC flow barriers - BETWEEN 150 GPM AND to RCP thermal barriers:

231 GPM GPM::

1) Open the breaker for 1FIS-685A (383' U18) 1CC685:

MCC 132X4 D4

2) SLOWLY throttle open CC from RCPs thermal barrier isolation valve:

1CC685 (395' CWA P-24)

3) Maintain CC flow from RCP thermal barriers between 150 GPM and 231 GPM GPM::

1FIS-685A (383' U18)

b. Deenergize charging pump(s) to RCS cold leg injection isolation valves:

1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4) 1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4)

c. Locally close charging pump(s) to RCS cold leg injection isolation valves using the handwheel:

1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26) 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)

Page 87 of 88

REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA UNIT 1 PRI-5 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT G (PG 3 OF 3)

MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI 5 MAINTAIN PZR LEVEL LEVEL:

a. Locally bypass 1CV121:

1) Open charging header flow control bypass valve for running CV pump:

o 1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CV pump room) o 1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CV pump room)

2) Close at least ONE charging header flow control valve manual isolation:

o 1CV8483A (364' +10' U13 CWA) o 1CV8483B (364' +8' U13 CWA)

b. Control charging header flow b. IF charging flow can NOT control bypass valve to be reduced with the 1CV121, maintain - STABLE STABLE:: THEN reduce charging through the RCP seals to PZR level 3 GPM PER PUMP using the RCP seal injection manual PZR pressure flow control valves:

1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33)

F0131 RCP 1 Seal Injection Wtr Flow 1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)

F0125 RCP 4 Seal Injection Wtr Flow 1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53)

F0129 RCP 2 Seal Injection Wtr Flow 1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53)

F0127 RCP 3 Seal Injection Wtr Flow 6 RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14 (Page 85)

-END-Page 88 of 88

REV. 106 OPERATOR ACTION

SUMMARY

1BwOA PRI-F:5 FOR 1BwOA PRI-5 IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9 9:

AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%

<50%::

GO TO ATTACHMENT F, SI Refill the day tank TERMINATION (Page 78)

IF MCR BECOMES HABITABLE HABITABLE::

GO TO ATTACHMENT D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR (Page 58)

USE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDS PANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL PANEL:

Source Range NI Intermediate Range NI SG pressures SG wide range levels PZR pressure PZR level RCS Hot Leg temperatures RCS Cold Leg temperatures PERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IF IF:

o RCP seal outlet temperature rises to greater than or equal to 235 235F

-OR-o RCP lower radial bearing temperature rises to greater than or equal to 225 F 225

-OR OR-o No seal injection flow is indicated to RCPs having no seal or radial bearing temperature indication IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SG AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%

FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:

Feed affected SG(s) between 60 GPM and 80 GPM for 10 MINUTES prior to restoring desired feedwater flow.

(Final)

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 had an automatic Safety Injection Actuation. The 1B and 1D RCFCs are out of service.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor directs you to perform 1BwEP-0, Step 7 to Verify RCFCs are running in Accident Mode.

SIM-508 Page 1 of 5

TASK TITLE: Start RCFCs in Accident Mode.

JPM No.: SIM-508 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No: 4C.VP-06 K/A No.: 022000A4.01 TASK No.: R-VP-007 Start-up a RCFC K/A IMP: 3.6/3.6 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 10 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM _ IN PLANT

_ SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. 1BwEP-0, Rev. 204, REACTOR TRIP OR SI MATERIALS:

1. 1BwEP-0, Step 7 TASK STANDARDS:

1. Start RCFC fans in low speed following SI with failure of SX valves to automatically align.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 had an automatic Safety Injection Actuation. The 1B and 1D RCFCs are out of service.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor directs you to perform 1BwEP-0, Step 7 to Verify RCFCs are running in Accident Mode.

SIM-508 Page 2 of 5

RECORD START TIME:

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE

1. Refer to 1BwEP-0, Reactor

LOCATE and refer to SAT UNSAT N/A Trip or Safety Injection. 1BwEP-0, Reactor Trip or Comments:

Safety Injection

2. Check Group 2 RCFC Accident

Group 2 RCFC Accident SAT UNSAT N/A Mode Status Lights. Mode Status Lights are NOT lit Comments:

- ALTERNATE PATH START**

3. Stop any RCFC running in High

Stop all RCFCs running SAT UNSAT N/A Speed. in High Speed (the two running must be stopped) Comments:

1VP01CA

1VP01CC

4. Close CNMT chiller inlet and

Close 1SX112A & SAT UNSAT N/A outlet valves. 1SX114A Comments:

5. Open CNMT chiller bypass

Verify Open 1SX147A. SAT UNSAT N/A valves.

Comments:

6. Verify/Open RCFC inlet valves.

1SX016A is OPEN. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

7. Verify RCFC outlet valves are

1SX027A is OPEN. SAT UNSAT N/A OPEN.

Comments:

8. Start all RCFCs in Low Speed.

Start all RCFCs in Low SAT UNSAT N/A Speed (for each, after a 20 second delay). Comments:

1VP01CA

1VP01CC SIM-508 Page 3 of 5

CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME: ________

COMMENTS:

SIM-508 Page 4 of 5

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS

Verify/perform TQ-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.

Reset to IC-21

Shut down the operating containment chiller (to prevent nuisance trip during JPM)

Place high and low switches for 1B and 1D RCFCs in PTL and place clearance order cards on them.

Close 1SX112B and 1SX114B COMMENTS:

SIM-508 Page 5 of 5

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 A. PURPOSE This procedure provides actions to verify proper response of the automatic protection systems following manual or automatic actuation of a Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, to assess plant conditions, and to identify the appropriate recovery procedure.

B. SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS

1) The following are symptoms that may require a Reactor Trip, if one has not occurred:

o Source range high level ³ 105 CPS o Intermediate range high level ³ 25% power o Power range lo-level ³ 25% power o Power range hi-level ³ 109% power o Power range positive rate ³ +5% power change in 2 seconds o Overtemperature Delta T ³ 132.5% +/- penalties o Overpower Delta T ³ 107.2% - penalties o High PZR pressure ³ 2385 PSIG o Low PZR pressure £ 1885 PSIG o High PZR level ³ 92%

o Single loop loss of flow £ 90% loop flow o Two loop loss of flow £ 90% loop flow in 2/4 loops o RCP breakers OPEN o RCP bus low frequency £ 57.0 HZ o RCP bus undervoltage £ 5268 VOLTS o Turbine trip emergency trip header £ 1000 PSIG oil pressure or Turbine throttle valves shut o SI manual actuation o CNMT high pressure SI ³ 3.4 PSIG o Low PZR pressure SI £ 1829 PSIG o Low steamline pressure SI £ 640 PSIG (rate sensitive) o Steam Generator water level low-low £ 18% of narrow range span

2) The following are symptoms of a reactor trip:

o Any Reactor Trip first out annunciator lit.

o Rapid drop in neutron level indicated by nuclear instrumentation.

o All shutdown and control rods fully inserted and rod bottom lights lit.

o Rapid drop in Unit load to zero power.

Page 1 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 Step 2 (continued)

3) The following may be symptoms that require a Reactor Trip and Safety Injection, if one has not occurred:

o Low PZR pressure £ 1829 PSIG PSIG..

o Low steamline pressure £ 640 PSIG (rate sensitive).

o CNMT high pressure ³ 3.4 PSIG PSIG. .

4) The following may be symptoms of a Reactor Trip and Safety Injection:

o Any SI first out annunciator lit.

o All Group 2 cold leg injection monitor lights lit.

o ESF equipment actuated.

o SI actuated BYPASS-PERMISSIVE light lit.

5) This procedure may also be entered:

o Anytime a manual reactor trip or safety injection is actuated.

o Anytime an SI is actuated or required while in Mode 3.

Page 2 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

NOTE *

With this procedure in effect, the *

Emergency Director shall evaluate *

for Emergency Plan conditions. *

NOTE *

"ADVERSE CNMT" is defined as: *

o CNMT pressure GREATER THAN 5 PSIG *

-OR- *

o CNMT radiation level GREATER THAN *

105 R/HR R/HR:: *

o 1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120 *

o 1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121

1 VERIFY REACTOR TRIP TRIP:: Manually trip the Reactor:

Rod bottom lights - ALL LIT

1PM05J

1PM06J

Reactor trip and bypass breakers - OPEN IF PR channels are greater than 5%

Neutron flux - DROPPING OR IR SUR is positive, THEN GO TO 1BwFR-S.1, RESPONSE TO NUCLEAR POWER GENERATION/ATWS, Step 1.

Page 3 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 2 VERIFY TURBINE TRIP TRIP:: Manually trip the turbine:

All Turbine throttle valves - o Trip pushbutton CLOSED o OWS graphic 5512

All Turbine governor valves -

CLOSED IF any throttle AND any governor valve are open, THEN isolate the steam supply:

o Manually run back the turbine at maximum rate at OWS graphic 5501:

1) Select turbine MANUAL.

2) Select RAPID.

3) Select and HOLD GV lower arrow.

o Manually actuate Main Steamline Isolation AND verify MSIV bypass valves are CLOSED.

3 VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSSES BUSSES:

a. ESF busses - AT LEAST ONE a. GO TO 1BwCA-0.0, LOSS OF ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:: ALL AC POWER, Step 1.

o Bus 141 o Bus 142

b. ESF busses - BOTH ENERGIZED ENERGIZED:

b. WHEN time permits, THEN try to restore power

Bus 141 to deenergized ESF bus per

Bus 142 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV ESF BUS.

Page 4 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 4 CHECK SI STATUS STATUS: :

a. Check if SI - ACTUATED ACTUATED:

a. Check if SI is required:

o Any SI first out o PZR pressure less than annunciator - LIT or equal to 1829 PSIG PSIG.

-OR- o Steamline pressure less than or equal to o SI ACTUATED permissive 640 PSIG PSIG.

light - LIT o CNMT pressure greater

-OR- than or equal to 3.4 PSIG PSIG.

o SI equipment - AUTOMATICALLY ACTUATED ACTUATED:: IF SI is required, THEN manually actuate SI.

o Either SI pump - RUNNING IF SI is NOT required, o Either CENT CHG pump to THEN GO TO 1BwEP ES-0.1, cold leg injection isol REACTOR TRIP RESPONSE, valve - OPEN OPEN:

Step 1.

o 1SI8801A o 1SI8801B

b.

Manually actuate SI:

1PM05J

1PM06J 5 DIRECT AN NSO TO PERFORM ATTACHMENT B (Page 32) WHILE CONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURE 6 VERIFY ECCS PUMPS RUNNING RUNNING:

Manually start pump(s).

CENT CHG pumps - BOTH RUNNING

RH pumps - BOTH RUNNING

SI pumps - BOTH RUNNING Page 5 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 7 VERIFY RCFCs RUNNING IN ACCIDENT MODE MODE::

a. Group 2 RCFC Accident Mode a. Manually align RCFCs in status lights - LIT accident mode as necessary:

1) Stop any RCFC running in high speed.

2) Close CNMT chiller inlet and outlet valves:

o 1SX112A o 1SX114A o 1SX112B o 1SX114B

3) Open CNMT chiller bypass valves:

o 1SX147A o 1SX147B

4) Open RCFC inlet and outlet valves:

o 1SX016A o 1SX016B o 1SX027A o 1SX027B

5) Start all RCFCs in low speed.

Page 6 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 8 VERIFY CNMT ISOLATION PHASE AA:

a. Group 3 CNMT Isol monitor a. Manually actuate CNMT lights - LIT Isolation Phase A.

IF any Phase A valve will NOT close, THEN manually close valve(s).

IF any valve(s) located outside of CNMT can NOT be closed manually, THEN locally close the valve(s) while continuing with Step 9.

9 VERIFY CNMT VENTILATION ISOLATION ISOLATION::

a. Group 6 CNMT Vent Isol monitor a. Perform the following:

lights - LIT

1) Stop any running VQ fans.

2) Manually close VQ isol valve(s) as necessary.

Page 7 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 10 VERIFY AF SYSTEM SYSTEM::

a. AF pumps - BOTH RUNNING a. Manually start pump(s).

b. AF isol valves - OPEN OPEN:: b. Manually open valve(s) as necessary.

1AF013A

1AF013B

1AF013C

1AF013D

1AF013E

1AF013F

1AF013G

1AF013H

c. AF flow control valves - c. Manually throttle valve(s)

THROTTLED THROTTLED:: open as necessary.

1AF005A

1AF005B

1AF005C

1AF005D

1AF005E

1AF005F

1AF005G

1AF005H 11 VERIFY CC PUMPS RUNNING RUNNING:

a. CC pumps - BOTH RUNNING a. Manually start pump(s).

12 VERIFY SX PUMPS RUNNING RUNNING:

a. SX pumps - BOTH RUNNING a. Manually start pump(s).

Page 8 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 13 CHECK IF MAIN STEAMLINES SHOULD BE ISOLATED ISOLATED::

a. Check for either of the a. GO TO Step 14 (Next following: Page).

o Any SG pressure - LESS THAN 640 PSIG

-OR-o CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) -

GREATER THAN 8.2 PSIG

b. Verify the following: b. Perform the following:

MSIVs - CLOSED 1) Manually actuate Main Steamline Isolation.

MSIV bypass valves - CLOSED

2) Verify MSIV and MSIV bypass valves are closed.

IF any valve will NOT close, THEN manually close valve(s).

Page 9 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 14 CHECK IF CS IS REQUIRED REQUIRED:

a. CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or a. Continue with Step 15 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) - HAS (Page 12).

RISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIG IF CNMT pressure rises to greater than 20 PSIG PSIG,,

THEN do Steps 14b thru 14f.

b. Group 6 CS monitor lights - LIT b. Manually actuate CS and Phase B Isolation.

IF Group 6 CS monitor lights are NOT LIT LIT,,

THEN GO TO ATTACHMENT C, Step 1 (Page 41).

c. Group 6 Phase B Isolation c. Manually actuate CS and monitor lights - LIT Phase B Isolation.

IF Group 6 Phase B isolation monitor lights are NOT LIT LIT, THEN manually close Phase B isolation valves.

d. Stop all RCPs

e. Check CS eductor suction flow e. Dispatch an operator with on running pump(s) - GREATER keys to verify valve(s)

THAN 15 GPM GPM:: are OPEN:

o 1FI-CS013 o 1CS035A (1A CS Pump Rm) o 1FI-CS014 o 1CS035B (1B CS Pump Rm)

Step continued on next page Page 10 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 14 (continued)

f. Check CS eductor additive flow f. Dispatch operator(s) with on running pump(s) - GREATER keys to verify valves are THAN 5 GPM GPM:: OPEN:

o 1FI-CS015 o Train A:

o 1FI-CS016

1CS017A (364' U13)

1CS018A (364' U13)

1CS040A (364' U13)

1CS021A (1A CS Pump Rm) [Throttled]

1CS046A (1A CS Pump Rm) o Train B:

1CS017B (364' U13)

1CS018B (364' U13)

1CS040B (364' U13)

1CS021B (1B CS Pump Rm) [Throttled]

1CS046B (1B CS Pump Rm)

Page 11 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 15 VERIFY TOTAL AF FLOW FLOW::

a. AF flow - GREATER THAN 500 GPM a. IF SG narrow range level is greater than 10% ((31%

31%

ADVERSE CNMT) in any SG, THEN control feed flow to maintain narrow range level.

IF SG narrow range level is less than 10% ((31%

31%

ADVERSE CNMT) in all SGs, THEN perform the following:

a) Manually start pump(s) and align valve(s) as necessary.

b) IF feed flow greater than 500 GPM can NOT be established, THEN GO TO 1BwFR-H.1, RESPONSE TO LOSS OF SECONDARY HEAT SINK, Step 1.

b. Check SG narrow range levels - b. IF ruptured SG is NOT RISING IN AN UNCONTROLLED identified AND affected SG MANNER narrow range level is greater than 10% ((31%

31%

ADVERSE CNMT),

THEN manually close its AF isol valves:

o SG 1A:

1AF013A

1AF013E o SG 1B:

1AF013B

1AF013F o SG 1C:

1AF013C

1AF013G o SG 1D:

1AF013D

1AF013H Page 12 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 16 VERIFY ECCS VALVE ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT:

a. Group 2 Cold Leg Injection a. Manually align valve(s) as monitor lights required for necessary.

ECCS valve alignment - LIT 17 VERIFY ECCS FLOW FLOW::

a. High head SI flow (1FI-917) - a. Manually start CENT CHG GREATER THAN 100 GPM pumps and align valves as necessary.

b. RCS pressure (1PI-403A/405) - b. GO TO Step 18 (Next LESS THAN 1700 PSIG Page).

c. SI pump discharge flow c. Manually start SI pumps (1FI-918/922) - GREATER THAN and align valves as 200 GPM necessary.

d. RCS pressure - LESS THAN d. GO TO Step 18 (Next 325 PSIG Page).

e. RH pump discharge flow e. Manually start RH pumps (1FI-618/619) - GREATER THAN and align valves as 1000 GPM necessary.

f. Check two CENT CHG pumps - f. IF only one CENT CHG pump RUNNING is running, THEN perform the following:

1) Verify head SI flow (1FI-917) greater than 100 GPM or SI pump discharge flow greater than 200 GPM GPM.

2) Trip all RCPs.

3) WHEN the RCS is depressurized, THEN manually close RCP seal injection isolation valves:

1CV8355A

1CV8355B

1CV8355C

1CV8355D Page 13 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 18 CHECK PZR PORVS AND SPRAY VALVES VALVES::

a. PORVs - CLOSED CLOSED:: a. IF PZR pressure is less than 2315 PSIG PSIG,

1RY455A THEN manually close PORVs.

1RY456 IF any PORV can NOT be closed, THEN manually or locally close its isol valve:

o 1RY8000A (1RY455A)

MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA) o 1RY8000B (1RY456)

MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA)

IF PORV isol valve can NOT be closed, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF REACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT, Step 1.

b.

PORV isol valves - AT LEAST b. GO TO Step 18d.

ONE ENERGIZED

c.

PORV relief path - AT LEAST c. Perform the following to ONE AVAILABLE AVAILABLE:

establish a PORV relief path for any PORV NOT

PORV in - AUTO failed open:

Associated isol valve - OPEN 1) Place the PORV in AUTO.

2) Open the associated PORV isol valve.

d. Normal PZR spray valves - d. IF PZR pressure is less CLOSED CLOSED: : than 2260 PSIG PSIG, THEN manually close spray

1RY455B valve(s).

1RY455C IF any spray valve(s) can not be closed, THEN stop RCP(s) as necessary to stop spray flow:

o RCP 1D o RCP 1C o RCP 1B o RCP 1A Page 14 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 19 CHECK RCS TEMPERATURES TEMPERATURES: : IF temperature is less than 557°F and dropping, o RCPs - ANY RUNNING RUNNING:: THEN perform the following:

RCS average temperature - a. Stop dumping steam.

STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557°F b. IF cooldown continues, THEN control total feed

-OR- flow:

o RCPs - NONE RUNNING RUNNING: :

Maintain total feed flow greater than 500 GPM

RCS cold leg temperature - until SG narrow range STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO level is greater than 557°F 10% (

(31%

31% ADVERSE CNMT) in at least one SG.

c. IF cooldown continues, THEN close MSIV and MSIV bypass valves.

IF temperature is greater than 557°F and rising, THEN perform the following:

o IF the C-9 permissive light is NOT LIT AND the MSIV(s) or MSIV bypass valve(s) are open, THEN dump steam to condenser:

1) Place MS header pressure controller in MANUAL and reduce demand signal to zero.

2) Place steam dump mode selector switch in STM PRESS mode.

3) Adjust MS header pressure controller in manual or auto.

-OR-o Dump steam using SG PORVs.

Page 15 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

NOTE *

Seal injection flow should be *

maintained to all RCPs to prevent *

seal damage due to overheating.

20 CHECK IF RCPS SHOULD BE STOPPED STOPPED:

a. RCPs - ANY RUNNING a. GO TO Step 21.

b. ECCS flow: b. GO TO Step 21.

o High head SI flow (1FI-917) -

GREATER THAN 100 GPM

-OR-o SI pump discharge flow (1FI-918/922) - GREATER THAN 200 GPM

c. RCS pressure - LESS THAN c. GO TO Step 21.

1425 PSIG

d. Stop all RCPs 21 CHECK IF SGs SECONDARY PRESSURE BOUNDARIES ARE INTACT INTACT:

a. Check pressure in all SGs: a. GO TO 1BwEP-2, FAULTED STEAM GENERATOR

NO SG PRESSURE DROPPING IN AN ISOLATION, Step 1.

UNCONTROLLED MANNER

NO SG COMPLETELY DEPRESSURIZED Page 16 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 22 CHECK IF SG TUBES ARE INTACT INTACT:: GO TO 1BwEP-3, STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE,

SJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust Gas Step 1.

radiation - HAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINT SETPOINT::

1PR27J Grid 1 1PS127

SG Blowdown Liquid radiation -

HAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINT SETPOINT::

1PR08J Grid 1 1PS108

Main Steamline radiation - HAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINT SETPOINT::

Main Steamline 1A, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA122

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA123

Main Steamline 1B, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB222

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB223

Main Steamline 1C, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC322

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC323

Main Steamline 1D, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD422

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD423 Page 17 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 23 CHECK IF RCS IS INTACT INTACT:: GO TO 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF REACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT,

CNMT area radiation monitors - Step 1.

HAVE REMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINTS SETPOINTS::

1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS101

1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS202

1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS303

1RT-AR011 Grid 4 4AS111

1RT-AR012 Grid 4 4AS112

1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120

1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121

CNMT pressure - LESS THAN 3.4 PSIG

CNMT floor drain sump level -

LESS THAN 46 INCHES INCHES::

1LI-PC002

1LI-PC003 Page 18 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 24 CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BE REDUCED REDUCED::

a. RCS subcooling - ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE:

a. GO TO Step 25.

o ICONIC DISPLAY

-OR-o ATTACHMENT A (Page 31)

b. Secondary heat sink: b. IF neither condition is satisfied, o Total feed flow to SGs - THEN GO TO Step 25.

GREATER THAN 500 GPM

-OR-o Narrow range level in at least one SG - GREATER THAN 10%

c. RCS pressure - STABLE OR RISING c. GO TO Step 25.

d. PZR level - GREATER THAN 14% d. Perform the following:

1) IF normal PZR spray is available, THEN try to stabilize RCS pressure.

2) RETURN TO Step 24a.

e. GO TO 1BwEP ES-1.1, SI TERMINATION, Step 1 25 INITIATE MONITORING OF CRITICAL SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS TREES Page 19 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 26 CHECK SG LEVELS LEVELS:

a. Narrow range levels - GREATER a. Maintain total feed flow THAN 10% greater than 500 GPM until narrow range level is greater than 10% in at least one SG.

b. Control feed flow to maintain b. IF narrow range level in narrow range levels - BETWEEN any SG continues to rise 10% AND 50% in an uncontrolled manner, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-3, STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE, Step 1.

Ú¿

³ CAUTION ³

³ If offsite power is lost after SI ³

³ reset, manual action may be required ³

³ to restart RH and SI pumps. ³ 27 RESET SI SI:: IF bypass permissive panel is energized and SI has NOT

a. Depress both SI reset reset, pushbuttons THEN reset SI per 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM

b. Verify SI ACTUATED permissive INACCESSIBILITY, ATTACHMENT light - NOT LIT E.

c. Verify AUTO SI BLOCKED permissive light - LIT 28 RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION ISOLATION:

Reset per 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY,

Phase A ATTACHMENT E.

Phase B if necessary Page 20 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 29 ESTABLISH INSTRUMENT AIR TO CONTAINMENT CONTAINMENT::

a. Check SACs - ANY RUNNING a. Dispatch an operator to start one SAC per BwOP SA-1, STARTUP AND OPERATION OF A STATION AIR COMPRESSOR.

Continue with Step 30 (Next Page). OBSERVE CAUTION PRIOR TO STEP 30.

WHEN a SAC is running, THEN do Step 29b.

b. Open instrument air CNMT isol valves:

1) 1IA065 1) Locally open the valve using a pneumatic jumper (391' CWA P-39).

Continue with Step 30 (Next Page). OBSERVE CAUTION PRIOR TO STEP 30.

WHEN 1IA065 is open, THEN open 1IA066.

2) 1IA066 Page 21 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED

Ú¿

³ CAUTION ³

³ RCS pressure should be monitored. ³

³ If RCS pressure drops in an ³

³ uncontrolled manner to less than ³

³ 325 PSIG PSIG,

, the RH pumps must be ³

³ manually restarted to supply water ³

³ to the RCS. ³ 30 CHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BE STOPPED STOPPED::

a. Check RCS pressure:

1) Pressure - GREATER THAN 1) GO TO 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF 325 PSIG REACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT, Step 1.

2) Pressure - STABLE OR RISING 2) GO TO Step 31 (Next Page).

b. Stop RH pumps and place in standby Page 22 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 31 CHECK SECONDARY RADIATION NORMAL NORMAL::

a. Sample all SGs for activity:

1) Open SG Blowdown Sample Isol valves:

1SD005A (SG 1A)

1SD005C (SG 1B)

1SD005D (SG 1C)

1SD005B (SG 1D)

2) Request Chem Dept to sample all SGs for activity

b. Check secondary radiation b. GO TO 1BwEP-3, trends (PPC or RM-11) - NORMAL STEAM GENERATOR TUBE FOR PLANT CONDITIONS CONDITIONS:

RUPTURE, Step 1.

SJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust Gas radiation:

1PR27J Grid 1 1PS127

SG Blowdown Liquid radiation:

1PR08J Grid 1 1PS108

Main Steamline radiation:

Main Steamline 1A, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA122

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA123

Main Steamline 1B, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB222

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB223

Main Steamline 1C, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC322

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC323

Main Steamline 1D, MSIV Rm:

1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD422

1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD423

c. Secondary activity samples - c. GO TO 1BwEP-3, NORMAL (WHEN AVAILABLE) STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE, Step 1.

Page 23 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 32 CHECK AUXILIARY BUILDING RADIATION RADIATION::

a. Check Aux Bldg radiation trends a. Evaluate cause of abnormal (PPC or RM-11) - NORMAL FOR conditions.

PLANT CONDITIONS CONDITIONS:

IF cause is loss of RCS

Unit 1 Aux Bldg vent stack inventory outside CNMT, effluent (1PR28J): THEN GO TO 1BwCA-1.2, LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT,

Grid 2 Beta 1PA228 Step 1.

Grid 2 Gas Low 1PB128

Grid 2 Iodine 1PC328

Grid 2 Gas High 1PD428

Unit 1 Aux Bldg vent stack effluent (1PR30J):

Grid 2 Gas Low 1PA130

Grid 2 Gas Med 1PB230

Grid 2 Gas High 1PC330

Grid 2 Effluent 1PF430

Unit 2 Aux Bldg vent stack effluent (2PR28J):

Grid 2 Beta 2PA228

Grid 2 Gas Low 2PB128

Grid 2 Iodine 2PC328

Grid 2 Gas High 2PD428

Unit 2 Aux Bldg vent stack effluent (2PR30J):

Grid 2 Gas Low 2PA130

Grid 2 Gas Med 2PB230

Grid 2 Gas High 2PC330

Grid 2 Effluent 2PF430 Step continued on next page Page 24 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 32a (continued)

ECCS cubicles:

RH/CS pump 1A Cubicle (1PR13J):

Grid 2 Beta 1PA213

Grid 2 Gas 1PB113

RH/CS pump 1B Cubicle (1PR14J):

Grid 2 Beta 1PA214

Grid 2 Gas 1PB114

RH HX 1A Cubicle (1PR15J):

Grid 2 Beta 1PA215

Grid 2 Gas 1PB115

RH HX 1B Cubicle (1PR16J):

Grid 2 Beta 1PA216

Grid 2 Gas 1PB116

CENT CHG pump 1A Cubicle (1PR17J):

Grid 2 Beta 1PA217

Grid 2 Gas 1PB117

CENT CHG pump 1B Cubicle (1PR18J):

Grid 2 Beta 1PA218

Grid 2 Gas 1PB118

Grid 4 Aux Bldg area radiation 33 CHECK PRT CONDITIONS NORMAL NORMAL:: Evaluate cause of abnormal conditions.

PRT Pressure - LESS THAN 6 PSIG

PRT Level - LESS THAN 88%

PRT Temperature - LESS THAN 125°F Page 25 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 34 CHECK IF DGs SHOULD BE STOPPED STOPPED:

a. 4KV busses - ENERGIZED BY a. Try to restore offsite OFFSITE POWER POWER:: power to 4KV busses:

Bus 141 1) Consult TSO for status

Bus 142 of offsite power restoration.

Bus 143

Bus 144 IF offsite power is available, THEN perform the following:

1) Restore offsite power to 4KV ESF busses per BwOP AP-32, SYNCHRONIZING A SAT TO A BUS BEING FED BY A DG.

2) Sync and close associated 4KV NON-ESF SAT feed breakers:

ACB 1432

ACB 1442 Step continued on next page Page 26 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 34 (continued)

IF offsite power can NOT be restored to 4KV NON-ESF bus(es),

THEN crosstie the NON-ESF bus(es) to the ESF bus(es) as follows:

1) Dispatch an operator to place the following switch in PULL OUT (Panel 0VS03J, 3rd floor HVAC room):

Service Bldg chiller 0A (Bus 144 only)

2) Place feeder breakers for affected 4KV NON-ESF bus(es) in PULL OUT:

o Bus 143:

ACB 1431

ACB 1432 o Bus 144:

ACB 1441

ACB 1442

3) Open all 480 volt transformer HIGH side and LOW side breakers for affected bus(es).

4) Open all 480 volt PZR heater transformer LOW side breakers at 1PM05J for affected bus(es).

5) Reset SI recirc sump isol valves if necessary:

1SI8811A

1SI8811B Step continued on next page Page 27 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 34 (continued)

6) Place non-running equipment in PULL OUT on affected bus(es):

Cnmt chillers

WS pumps

SACs

7) Close affected bus(es)

NON-ESF to ESF crosstie breaker:

o ACB 1411 o ACB 1421 Load equipment as necessary while continuing with Step 34b (Page 29):

1) Restore PZR heaters:

a) Close 4KV PZR heater transformer HIGH side breakers.

b) Close 480 volt PZR heater transformer LOW side breakers at 1PM05J.

2) Energize Unit 1 480 volt busses.

3) Start a WS pump per BwOP WS-1, STARTUP AND OPERATION OF WS SYSTEM, if necessary.

Step continued on next page Page 28 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Step 34 (continued)

4) Restore air, if necessary:

a) Start a SAC per BwOP SA-1, STARTUP AND OPERATION OF A STATION AIR COMPRESSOR.

b) Restore IA to CNMT:

1) Open 1IA065.

2) Open 1IA066.

5) Start other NON-ESF loads as necessary:

o Boric acid transfer pump o SFP cooling pump o Air side seal oil pump o Hydrogen side seal oil pump IF any 4KV ESF bus is NOT energized, THEN perform 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV ESF BUS as time permits.

b. Stop any unloaded DG and place in standby per BwOP DG-12, DIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWN 35 RETURN TO STEP 18 (Page 14)

-END-Page 29 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 (NORMAL)

RCS Pressure (PSIG) 2600 2400 2200 ACCEPTABLE 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 NOT 1000 ACCEPTABLE 800 Containment 600 Conditions:

Adverse---

400 Normal---

---Saturation 200 0

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 RCS Temperature ( °F)

FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1 RCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN Page 30 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT A A. Determination of Post-Accident RCS Subcooling Subcooling:

1) Check CNMT for ADVERSE conditions:

o CNMT pressure greater than 5 PSIG PSIG.

-OR-o CNMT radiation greater than 105 R/HR R/HR:

o 1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120 o 1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121

2) Check RCS pressure on wide range pressure instruments (1PI-403A/405).

3) Determine temperature for RCS pressure using NORMAL or ADVERSE CNMT curves per FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1 (Previous Page).

4) Check average of ten highest core exit TCs from ICONIC DISPLAY OR MCB indicators (1TI-IT001/IT002).

5) If average of ten highest core exit TCs is less than temperature for RCS pressure, then acceptable subcooling exists.

Page 31 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION 1 VERIFY FW ISOLATION ISOLATION:: Manually trip pump(s) and close valve(s) as necessary.

FW pumps - TRIPPED IF any FW reg valve can NOT

FW isolation monitor lights - be closed, LIT THEN manually close its associated FW shutoff valve:

FW pumps discharge valves -

CLOSED CLOSED:: o 1FW006A (1FW510) o 1FW006B (1FW520)

1FW002A o 1FW006C (1FW530)

1FW002B o 1FW006D (1FW540)

1FW002C 2 VERIFY DGs RUNNING RUNNING:

a. DGs - BOTH RUNNING a. Manually start DG(s).

b. DGs SX valve - OPEN OPEN: : b. Manually open valve(s).

1SX169A

1SX169B

c. Dispatch operator to check DGs operation 3 VERIFY GENERATOR TRIP TRIP::

a. Unit 1 Main Transformer output a. Manually open breaker(s).

breakers - OPEN OPEN:

OCB 1-8

OCB 7-8

b. PMG output breaker - OPEN b. Manually open PMG output breaker.

Page 32 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 2 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION 4 VERIFY CONTROL ROOM VENTILATION ALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION OPERATION::

a. Control Room outside air intake a. Locally verify the radiation - LESS THAN HIGH following fans are ALARM SETPOINT SETPOINT:: TRIPPED:

Control Room Outside Air 1) Control Room offices Intake 0A: HVAC Panel 0VV01J (451' K24):

0PR31J Grid 2 0PA231

0PR31J Grid 2 0PB131

0VV01CA, Supply Fan

0PR31J Grid 2 0PC331 OA

0PR32J Grid 2 0PA232

0VV01CB, Supply Fan

0PR32J Grid 2 0PB132 OB

0PR32J Grid 2 0PC332

2) Laboratory HVAC Panel

Control Room Outside Air 0VL01J (426' M10):

Intake 0B:

0VL02CA, Fume Hood

0PR33J Grid 2 0PA233 Exhaust Fan OA

0PR33J Grid 2 0PB133

0VL02CB, Fume Hood

0PR33J Grid 2 0PC333 Exhaust Fan OB

0PR34J Grid 2 0PA234

0PR34J Grid 2 0PB134 3) Radwaste Building HVAC

0PR34J Grid 2 0PC334 Panel 0VW01J (433' J45 SB):

0VW03CA, Exhaust Fan OA

0VW03CB, Exhaust Fan OB Step continued on next page Page 33 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 3 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION Step 4 (continued)

b. Operating VC train equipment - b. Manually start equipment RUNNING RUNNING: : for VC train in operation.

o Train A: IF equipment can NOT be started,

Supply fan 0A THEN perform the following unless attempts have

Return fan 0A already failed to start both trains:

M/U fan 0A a) Reset Control Room Vent

Chilled water pump 0A Isolation.

MCR chiller 0A b) Stop inoperable VC train equipment.

o Train B:

c) Start opposite VC train

Supply fan 0B equipment.

Return fan 0B d) RETURN TO Step 4b.

M/U fan 0B

Chilled water pump 0B

MCR chiller 0B

c. Operating VC train dampers - c. Perform the following ALIGNED ALIGNED: : unless attempts have already failed to start

M/U fan outlet damper - NOT and align both trains:

FULLY CLOSED CLOSED:

1) Reset Control Room Vent o 0VC24Y (Train A) Isolation.

o 0VC08Y (Train B)

2) Stop inoperable VC train

VC train M/U filter light - equipment.

LIT

3) Start opposite VC train equipment.

4) RETURN TO Step 4b.

Step continued on next page Page 34 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 4 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION Step 4 (continued)

d. Operating VC train M/U filter d. Place M/U Fltr Inlet aligned to - NORMAL TBTB:

Select switch to NORMAL TB position.

o Train A:

0VC25Y - OPEN

0VC312Y - CLOSED o Train B:

0VC09Y - OPEN

0VC313Y - CLOSED

e.

Operating VC train Charcoal e. Place RECIRC Charcoal Absorber - ALIGNED ALIGNED:

Absorber selector switch to the ABSORB position.

o Train A:

IF Charcoal Absorber is

0VC43Y bypass damper - still NOT aligned, CLOSED THEN perform the following unless attempts have

0VC21Y inlet damper - OPEN already failed to start and align both trains:

0VC22Y outlet damper -

OPEN 1) Reset Control Room Vent Isolation.

-OR-

2) Stop inoperable VC train o Train B: equipment.

0VC044Y bypass damper - 3) Start opposite VC train CLOSED equipment.

0VC05Y inlet damper - OPEN 4) RETURN TO Step 4b (Previous Page).

0VC06Y outlet damper -

OPEN

f. Control Room pressure f. Restore MCR pressure per (MCR/TB DP, OPDI-VC038) - BwOP VC-14, MAIN CONTROL GREATER THAN +0.125" H 2 O ROOM PRESSURE LOW, while continuing with this procedure.

Page 35 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 5 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION 5 VERIFY AUX BLDG VENTILATION ALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION OPERATION: :

a.

Inaccessible Filter Plenums - a. Align plenums and start TWO PLENUMS ALIGNED WITH fans as necessary per CHARCOAL ABSORBERS ON-LINE ON-LINE:

BwOP VA-5, AUX BLDG CHARCOAL BOOSTER FAN o Plenum A: OPERATION.

o Fan 0VA03CA - RUNNING RUNNING::

0VA022Y Flow Cont damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA020Y Byp Isol damper - CLOSED

-OR-o Fan 0VA03CB - RUNNING RUNNING::

0VA023Y Flow Cont damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA436Y Byp Isol damper - CLOSED Step continued on next page Page 36 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 6 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION Step 5a (continued) o Plenum B:

o Fan 0VA03CC - RUNNING RUNNING:

0VA024Y Flow Cont damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA021Y Byp Isol damper - CLOSED

-OR-o Fan 0VA03CD - RUNNING RUNNING:

0VA025Y Flow Cont damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA437Y Byp Isol damper - CLOSED o Plenum C:

o Fan 0VA03CE - RUNNING RUNNING:

0VA067Y Flow Cont damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA052Y Byp Isol damper - CLOSED

-OR-o Fan 0VA03CF - RUNNING RUNNING:

0VA072Y Flow Cont damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA438Y Byp Isol damper - CLOSED Page 37 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 7 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION 6 VERIFY FHB VENTILATION ALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION OPERATION:

a. FHB Charcoal Absorbers - ONE a. Align one train per TRAIN ALIGNED ALIGNED:: BwOP VA-6, FUEL HANDLING BLDG CHARCOAL BOOSTER FAN o Train A: OPERATION.

Fan 0VA04CA - RUNNING

0VA060Y Charcoal Absorber Inlet Isol damper - OPEN

0VA057Y Filter Flow Control damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA051Y Charcoal Absorber Bypass Isolation damper -

CLOSED

-OR-o Train B:

Fan 0VA04CB - RUNNING

0VA055Y Charcoal Absorber Inlet Isolation damper -

OPEN

0VA062Y Filter Flow Control damper - NOT FULLY CLOSED

0VA435Y Charcoal Absorber Bypass Isolation damper -

CLOSED Page 38 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 8 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION 7 SHUTDOWN UNNECESSARY PLANT EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT::

Trip all running HD pumps

Shutdown FW pumps as necessary per:

³ o BwOP FW-2, SHUTDOWN OF A

³ TURBINE DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATER

³ PUMP

³ o BwOP FW-8, SHUTDOWN OF A

³ MOTOR DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATER

³ PUMP

Shutdown all unnecessary CD/CB pumps per BwOP CD/CB-2, CONDENSATE/CONDENSATE BOOSTER SYSTEM SHUTDOWN

Shutdown all unnecessary CW pumps per BwOP CW-2, CIRCULATING WATER PUMP/SYSTEM SHUTDOWN Page 39 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT B (PG 9 OF 9)

BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION

³ 8 INITIATE PERIODIC CHECKING OF

³ SPENT FUEL COOLING COOLING:

³ a. Locally verify SFP level is a. IF SFP level drops to the ³

³ greater than 420' ELEV (20 FT 420' ELEV, ³

³ above top of fuel) THEN makeup to the SFP per ³

³ o BwOP FC-11, SPENT FUEL ³ POOL LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ³ o 1BwOA REFUEL-2, REACTOR ³ CAVITY OR SPENT FUEL ³ POOL UNCONTROLLED LEVEL ³ LOSS ³

³ b. Locally verify SFP b. IF SFP temperature is ³

³ temperature - STABLE rising, ³ THEN restore cooling: ³

0BwOA REFUEL-3, LOSS OF ³ SPENT FUEL COOLING ³

³ c. NOTIFY the STA of SFP cooling

³ Status 9 NOTIFY UNIT SUPERVISOR OF THE FOLLOWING FOLLOWING::

Manual actions taken

Failed Equipment status

ATTACHMENT B completed

-END-Page 40 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 2)

MANUAL CS ACTUATION 1 CHECK CS VALVE ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT::

a. CS pump RWST suction valves - a. Manually open valve(s).

OPEN OPEN::

1CS001A

1CS001B

b. CS pump header isol valves - b. IF associated CS pump is OPEN OPEN:: NOT running, THEN manually open the

1CS007A valve(s).

1CS007B IF associated CS pump is running, THEN perform the following to open the affected valve(s):

1) Place CS pump(s) in PULL OUT.

2) Verify CS pump(s) test switch is in NORMAL.

3) Manually open the valve(s) after the 30 SECOND time delay.

4) Restart CS pump(s).

c. CS eductor spray additive c. Perform the following for valves - OPEN OPEN:: the affected train(s):

1CS019A 1) Place CS pump(s) test

1CS019B switch in TEST.

2) Manually open the valve(s).

3) Place CS pump(s) test switch in NORMAL.

d. CS eductor inlet flow control d. Manually open the valves - OPEN OPEN:: valve(s).

1CS010A

1CS010B Page 41 of 42

REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION 1BwEP-0 WOG 2 UNIT 1 STEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 2)

MANUAL CS ACTUATION 2 CHECK CS PUMPS RUNNING

a. CS pumps - AT LEAST ONE RUNNING a. Locally start ONE CS pump per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT, while continuing with this procedure.

3 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 14c (Page 10)

-END-Page 42 of 42

REV. 204 OPERATOR ACTION

SUMMARY

1BwEP-F:0 WOG 2 FOR 1BwEP-0 TRIP RCPs WHEN : GO TO 1BwEP ES-1.3 IF :

o CC water to RCP lost

RWST level <46%

(affected pumps only)

-OR- AF PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE LOW o CNMT Phase B actuated ALARM (1-3-A7) LIT :

-OR-o BOTH of the following conditions o Crosstie unit CSTs per exist: BwOP CD-2, RAISING CST LEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BY

RCS pressure <1425 PSIG CROSSTYING

-AND- o Reduce cooldown rate

High head SI flow indicator (1FI-917) >100 GPM or SI AF PUMP SX SUCTION VLVS ARMED pump discharge flow >200 GPM ALARM (1-3-E7) LIT :

CLOSE ASSOCIATED 1AF013 VALVES

Verify operating AF pumps AFTER STEP 15 COMPLETION IF A SX suction valves open:

SG TUBE RUPTURE IS IDENTIFIED o 1AF006A and 1AF017A AND o 1AF006B and 1AF017B AFFECTED SG NARROW RANGE LEVEL

>10% (31% ADVERSE CNMT) :

AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%

o Level rising in an

Refill the day tank uncontrolled manner

-OR- IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY o Abnormal secondary radiation SG AND NR SG LEVEL LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45% FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN :

Feed affected SG(s) between 60 GPM and 80 GPM for 10 MINUTES prior to restoring desired feedwater flow

REV. 204 CONTINUOUS ACTION

SUMMARY

1BwEP-C:0 WOG 2 FOR 1BwEP-0 14 CHECK IF CS IS REQUIRED (while in this procedure) :

IF CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937)

HAS RISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIG PSIG,

, THEN:

1) Stop all RCPs

2) Verify Group 6 CS monitor lights - LIT

3) Verify Group 6 Phase B isolation monitor lights - LIT

4) Verify CS eductor suction flow on running pump(s) -

GREATER THAN 15 GPM GPM::

5) Verify CS eductor additive flow on running pump(s) -

GREATER THAN 5 GPM GPM:

19 CHECK RCS TEMPERATURES (while in this procedure) :

o Any RCP running - RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557°F

-OR-o NO RCPs running - RCS COLD LEG TEMPERATURES STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557°F 26 CHECK SG LEVELS :

Maintain total feed flow greater than 500 GPM until narrow range level is greater than 10% in at least one SG.

Control feed flow to maintain narrow range levels -

BETWEEN 10% AND 50%

IF narrow range level in any SG continues to rise in an uncontrolled manner, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-3.

30 CHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BE STOPPED :

IF RCS pressure is less than 325 PSIG PSIG, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-1.

Stop RH pumps and place in standby if:

1) RCS pressure - GREATER THAN 325 PSIG AND

2) RCS pressure - STABLE OR RISING

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1.

3. The 1B D/G was manually started, and is currently supplying bus 142 (DG is only source currently feeding bus 142) for a special engineering test. The test is now complete.

4. Breaker 1424 is closed to prevent equipment sequencing onto bus 142 INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to synchronize bus 142 to SAT 142-2 per BwOP AP-32.

2. During a pre-job brief it was determined that step F.1 and F.3 of BwOP AP-32 are N/A. Step F.2 is complete. You are to continue at step F.4 of BwOP AP-32.

Page 1 of 5 SIM-601

TASK TITLE: Synchronize a SAT to a Bus Being Fed by an Emergency Diesel Generator JPM No.: SIM-601 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4D.AP-03 K&A No.: 062000A4.07 TASK No.: R-AP-013, Sync. SAT to bus fed by D/G K&A IMP: 3.1/3.1 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 19 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. BwOP AP-32, Rev. 5, Synchronizing a SAT to a Bus Being Fed by a DG.

MATERIALS:

1. BwOP AP-32, Rev. 5.

TASK STANDARDS:

1. Correctly synchronize SAT 142-2 to a bus being fed by the 1B D/G.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1.

3. The 1B D/G was manually started, and is currently supplying bus 142 (DG is only source currently feeding bus 142) for a special engineering test. The test is now complete.

4. Breaker 1424 is closed to prevent equipment sequencing onto bus 142 INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to synchronize bus 142 to SAT 142-2 per BwOP AP-32.

2. During a pre-job brief it was determined that step F.1 and F.3 of BwOP AP-32 are N/A. Step F.2 is complete. You are to continue at step F.4 of BwOP AP-32.

Page 2 of 5 SIM-601

RECORD START TIME Note: Provide a copy of BwOP AP-32 to the examinee.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

1. Refer to BwOP AP-32. Open BwOP AP-32. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

CUE: All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.

2. Verify 1B D/G is operating properly. VERIFY 1B D/G is operating SAT UNSAT N/A properly as follows: Comments:

1B D/G frequency is approximately 60 hz.

1B D/G voltage is approximately 4160 volts.

3. Prepare 1B D/G for parallel Prepare 1B D/G for parallel SAT UNSAT N/A operation with SAT 142-2. operations as follows: Comments:

TURN ACB 1422 Synchroscope Switch ON.

USING the 1B D/G voltage adjust control, adjust the RUNNING voltage slightly HIGHER than the INCOMING voltage (0-4 volts).

o VERIFY the same voltage on AB, BC, and CA with the 1B D/G Voltmeter selector switch.

USING the 1B D/G governor adjust control, ADJUST generator speed such that the synchroscope is rotating slowly in the SLOW direction.

4. Parallel the 1B D/G to SAT 142-2. Parallel the 1B D/G to SAT 142-2 SAT UNSAT N/A as follows: Comments:

When the synchroscope is slightly before the 12 oclock position, CLOSE ACB 1422.

o VERIFY the synchroscope has LOCKED IN at the 12 oclock position.

o TURN the synchroscope switch for ACB 1422 to OFF.

o Adjust 1B D/G KVARs as needed.

5. Restore breaker positions. Restore breaker positions as SAT UNSAT N/A follows: Comments:

OPEN ACB 1424 CUE: When asked, ACB 2424 is

PLACE ACB 2424 in AFTER in after trip. TRIP.

Page 3 of 5 SIM-601

6. Unload 1B D/G per BwOP DG-12. Refer to BwOP DG-12 to unload SAT UNSAT N/A 1B D/G. Comments:

CUE: The US will direct another NSO to unload the 1B D/G.

CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:

Page 4 of 5 SIM-601

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-601 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): Any At Power IC.

MALFUNCTION #S: N/A COMMENTS:

1. Swap to 1B SX pump to put load on Bus 142.

2. Place 1B D/G auto recluse circuit arm switch in SURV TEST.

3. Start 1B D/G and sync to grid.

4. Load 1B D/G until SAT feed amps = 0.

5. Close 1424.

6. Open 1422.

7. Turn on 1422 synchroscope and adjust 1B D/G speed until the synchroscope is rotating in the FAST direction.

8. Adjust 1B D/G voltage so running voltage is LOWER than incoming voltage.

9. Turn off 1422 synchroscope. Leave Synchroscope Key Switch in 1423 but OFF.

10. Ensure the Governor Adjuster and the Voltage Adjuster are not set at values that happen to be exactly what the examinee needs (i.e. the intent is to force the examinee to manipulate the controls).

Page 5 of 5 SIM-601

BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use SYNCHRONIZING A SAT TO A BUS BEING FED BY A DG A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure outlines the steps necessary to parallel a SAT to a BUS being fed by a Diesel Generator.

B. REFERENCES

1. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP DG-12, Diesel Generator Shutdown.

b. BwOP DG-13, Trouble Shooting Diesel Generators.

2. Station Drawings:

a. 20E-0-4001

b. 20E-0-4000B

3. Station Commitment: 456-103-84-0690051 Step D.5.

C. PREREQUISITES

1. The diesel generator is running and feeding its respective bus.

2. Diesel generator control MODE switch in REMOTE.

3. Notify Security one hour prior to energizing/de-energizing overhead lines that intersect the PA boundary.

1

BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use D. PRECAUTIONS

1. Continuous rating of generator is 5500 Kw.

2. Short term maximum (2 hours2.314815e-5 days 5.555556e-4 hours 3.306878e-6 weeks 7.61e-7 months ) rating of generator is 6050 Kw.

3. Minimum continuous steady-state loading on the diesel generator is 3000 Kw.

4. When a Diesel Generator is in the Emergency MODE and paralleled to the grid DO NOT return the Emergency MODE Speed Voltage C/S to Auto if it is currently in the Manual Emergency position. This will prevent Isochronous operation while in parallel.

5. Operate only ONE Emergency Diesel Generator in parallel with offsite power at any one time. This will prevent damage to more than one Diesel Generator if a fault condition develops on the grid.

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. Adhere to the following Generator load limits when DG is in parallel with offsite power:

a. Continuous rating - 5500 KW and 1000 KVAR.

b. 2000 Hour Rating - 5935 KW and 1000 KVAR.

c. Two Hour Rating - 6050 KW and 1000 KVAR.

2. Refer to BwOP DG-13 if diesel generator trip/trouble occurs.

2

BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. MAIN BODY CAUTION if the Diesel Generator started due to a loss of off site power, the Diesel Generator Output Breaker may trip if the Mode Control Switch is placed in "MANUAL TEST MODE".

NOTE If the diesel generator was started manually, Step 1 is not necessary. The MODE control switch may be left in auto.

NOTE Do not close in SAT Feed Breaker if a Degraded Voltage Condition

(<3990 VAC) exists on the off site power source (switchyard).

1. VERIFY/PLACE the Diesel Generator in "Manual Emerg MODE" to enable speed and voltage control.

2. If synchronizing the SAT to the UNIT 1 ESF Bus, perform the following:

a. VERIFY/PLACE ACB 2414/2424 CONTROL Switch in the PULL TO LOCK position.

b. TURN the ACB 1414/1424 Synchroscope Switch to ON.

NOTE The following step will cause the DG to shift to DROOP mode. The engine may run slower as noted by a drop in RPM and Frequency.

c. CLOSE ACB 1414/1424 to place the Diesel Generator in the DROOP MODE.

d. TURN the ACB 1414/1424 Synchroscope Switch to OFF.

3

BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use F. 3. If synchronizing the SAT to the UNIT 2 ESF Bus perform the following:

a. VERIFY/PLACE ACB 1414/1424 CONTROL Switch in the PULL TO LOCK position.

b. TURN the ACB 2414/2424 Synchroscope Switch to ON.

NOTE The following step will cause the DG to shift to DROOP mode. The engine may run slower as noted by a drop in RPM and Frequency.

c. CLOSE ACB 2414/2424 to place the Diesel Generator in the DROOP MODE.

d. TURN the ACB 2414/2424 Synchroscope Switch to OFF.

4. VERIFY/ADJUST the diesel generator frequency to approximately 60 hz and voltage to approximately 4160 volts.

5. TURN the SAT Feed Bkr Synchroscope Switch to "ON".

6. USING the diesel generator voltage adjust control, adjust the "RUNNING" voltage slightly HIGHER than the "INCOMING" voltage (0-4 volts).

7. VERIFY the same voltage on "AB", "BC", and "CA" with Diesel Gen Voltmeter selector switch.

8. USING the diesel generator governor adjust control, ADJUST generator speed such that the synchroscope is rotating slowly in the SLOW direction.

9. When the synchroscope is slightly before the "12 o'clock" position, CLOSE the SAT Feed Breaker.

10. VERIFY the synchroscope has LOCKED IN at the "12 o'clock" position.

11. TURN the SAT Feed Breaker Synchroscope Switch to "OFF".

12. OPEN the ACB that was closed in step F.2.c./3.c.

13. VERIFY/PLACE ACB CONTROL Switches for all breakers in steps F.2.a. and F.3.a. to the AFTER TRIP position.

14. UNLOAD the diesel generator per BwOP DG-12.

(Final) 4

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO.

2. Both units are at full power with all systems normal for current plant conditions.

3. System Engineering is preparing to perform the incore detector operability surveillance, and needs the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor audible alarm disabled.

INITIATING CUES:

The US has directed you to disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor for Unit 1 per BwOP IC-9, step F.1.a.

Page 1 of 4 SIM-707

TASK TITLE: Operate a Rad Monitor (Disable Incore Seal Table Monitor Audible Alarm)

JPM No.: SIM-707 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.AR-03 K&A No.: 073000A4.02 TASK No.: R-AR-001, Operate the RM-11 Rad K&A IMP: 3.7/3.7 Monitoring System EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 2, 3 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 9 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. BwOP IC-9, Rev. 21, Movable Incore Detector Operation

2. TRM 3.3.a. Movable Incore Detectors MATERIALS:

1. BwOP IC-9, Rev. 21 TASK STANDARDS:

1. Disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Radiation Monitor.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO.

2. Both units are at full power with all systems normal for current plant conditions.

3. System Engineering is preparing to perform the incore detector operability surveillance and needs the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor audible alarm disabled.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor for Unit 1 per BwOP IC-9, step F.1.a.

Page 2 of 4 SIM-707

RECORD START TIME PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

1. Refer to BwOP IC-9 Locate and open the following: SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

CUE: After the student locates

BwOP IC-9, Step F.1.a correct procedure, provide a copy.

All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.

2. Select 1AR014J skid on RM-11. Select 1AR014J skid at the RM- SAT UNSAT N/A 11 keyboard as follows: Comments:

PLACE the RM-11 in Supervisor mode.

Channel 4303 is entered.

SELECT grid 4 on the RM-1AR014J has white cursor 11.

surrounding it.

DEPRESS, in order, 4, 3, 0, 3.

DEPRESS SEL.

3. Disable the audible alarm for the Disable the audible alarm for SAT UNSAT N/A Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor. the Incore Seal Table Rad Comments:

Monitor as follows:

Channel Item button

Push the CHANNEL ITEM pushed. button.

16 inserted, Select

On the keypad, TYPE 16 pushbutton pushed. and push the SELECT pushbutton.

CUE: As US and Unit NSOs, o Notify US and both Unit NSOs acknowledge notification of of expected alarm on the RM-expected RM-11 alarm. 11 due to next step.

0 inserted, Enter button

On the keypad, TYPE 0 and pushed. PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.

RM-11 in Normal mode. o PLACE the RM-11 to NORMAL mode.

CUE: As US/NSO acknowledge o Inform US/NSO audible Alarm report of audible alarm for Incore Seal Table Rad disabled. Monitor is disabled.

CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:

Page 3 of 4 SIM-707

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-707 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): At power with RM-11 operating.

MALFUNCTION #S: N/A COMMENTS:

1. Ensure Seal Table Rad Monitor (Grid 4, 4303), is enabled by selecting Channel Item 16 and entering a 1.

2. Place RM-11 on Grid 1.

3. Ensure RM-11 NOT in supervisory mode.

Page 4 of 4 SIM-707

PROCEDURE BwOP IC-9 UNIT NO. REVISION NO.

BRAIDWOOD STATION 21 PROCEDURE TITLE:

MOVABLE INCORE DETECTOR OPERATION Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 18 This procedure is being revised to reflect the EC 375574 installation of the Replacement Plant Process ATI 1172997-11 Computer on Unit 1.

19 Inserted table on page 11 that was inadvertently PCRA 1364041-01 removed in previous revision.

20 Add defeat/restoration steps for Loose Parts PCRA 1371608-02 1VE-LM003 and 1VE-LM004 Alarms for Flux Maps. PCRA 1408795-02 Added step to Attachment A step G to return the DRIVE SELECTOR switch back to the ALL position, if desired.

Reformat Attachment B to clarify actions to clear a blocked thimble.

21 Changes steps F.3.g, F.3.i and Figure 1 per PCRA 1435306-03 EC 391242 due to thimble blockage at core positions EC 391242 L10 and R11.

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use MOVABLE INCORE DETECTOR OPERATION A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY The purpose of this procedure is to perform an operability check of the Incore Detector (IC) System pursuant to TRM 3.3.a. Also, this procedure describes the steps necessary to move the incore detectors to map the core and place back in storage.

Testing will be performed at the interval of at least once per 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months , applicable when the IC System is used for recalibration of the excore neutron flux detector system, monitoring the Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (in accordance with Tech Spec SR 3.2.4.2), or measurement of FNH, FCQ (Z), W(Z), FWQ (Z), and calibration of the Power Distribution System (PDMS).

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Specs:

a. TRM 3.3.a, Movable Incore Detectors.

b. 3.2.4, Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio.

c. TRM 3.3.h, Power Distribution Monitoring System.

2. Station Drawings (Specification 2702, S.O. 360):

a. 6062D83, Sheet 4.

b. 43118, Sheets 2, 3 and 5, Unit 1.

c. 43119, Sheets 2, 3 and 5, Unit 2.

d. 27650, Sheets 3 and 5.

e. 27641, Sheet 9.

f. 43118, Sheet 1-6.

3. Vendor Manual: Technical Manual for Incore Instrumentation Byron/Braidwood Units 1 & 2 (2702-360) Book 1 & 2.

1

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use B. 4. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP IC-E1/E2, Electrical Lineup.

b. BwOP IC-M1/M2, Mechanical Lineup.

c. NF-AP-576, Determination of Rod Position Using Movable Incore Detector System (MIDS).

C. PREREQUISITES

1. Notify the Shift Manager that this surveillance involves movements of the incore movable detectors and as a result, no personnel should be allowed in containment until this procedure is complete unless there is an incore operability concern.

2. The main power circuit breakers should be closed and power turned on to each detector readout panel for at least 30 minutes before using the flux mapping system. Move the detectors to the bottom of the core to warm up, if the core is to be flux mapped. (Data taken.)

3. BwOP IC-E1/E2 applicable portions completed.

4. BwOP IC-M1/M2 completed.

5. There are sufficient movable detectors, detector drives and strip chart recorders, or disc space (paperless recorder) to collect the required data via the process computer.

6. Compact Flash Cards 2-4Gb or larger will be required for data storage from each of the recorders that will be used. (Only required if actually taking data.)

2

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use D. PRECAUTIONS

1. Personnel may be allowed in containment while the detectors are in a fully withdrawn position to address an operability problem or concern that exists with an Incore Detector(s). (Refer to BwAP 1450 -1 Access to Containment requirements with incore capable of moving.)

2. Irradiated detectors, in the withdrawn or parked position, may pose a radiation hazard. Personnel required to be working around the Incore Detector System should follow the specific requirements of the applicable RWP and Radiation Protection Dept.

3. Reactor Coolant System controlling parameters (i.e. temperature, xenon distribution, and boron concentration) as well as power level should be constant during the core map or as directed by a Qualified Nuclear Engineer (QNE) or designee.

4. Obtain the permission of the Shift Manager or designee prior to operating the IC system.

5. Care must be taken not to drive the detectors into the top of the core, withdraw the detectors past the safety limit switch or change the position of the Operation Selector Switch while the detector is inserted beyond the withdrawal limit switch.

6. Watch for slippage of the detector drive clutch. This can be observed by detector position lights stopping while the detector drive is still in operation.

7. Operation SELECTOR and PATH SELECTOR switch positions are not to be changed unless the detector is at its withdrawal limit. If the withdrawn limit switch is disabled for an inoperable detector, the PATH SELECTOR switch may be changed for emergency passes.

8. Inoperable detector drives may be maintained in the OFF position. Steps associated with operation of inoperable drives may be marked N/A.

9. Inoperable detector path may be placed in the OFF position during the particular pass. Steps associated with operation of inoperable paths may be marked N/A.

10. Do NOT attempt to unblock a path that was previously identified as being blocked without Operations Management approval. Attempting to unblock a path can lead to the loss of detector function or other system capabilities due to unavailable 10-paths. Authorized attempts should consider what affect losing a detector and associated equipment have on the system, as well as required equipment per TLCO 3.3.a. A list of previously identified blocked paths can be found in the Incore Limits Operator Aid.

3

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use D. 11. When the START pushbutton on the electronic recorders is pushed, the recorder will begin recording at low speed (10 hour1.157407e-4 days 0.00278 hours 1.653439e-5 weeks 3.805e-6 months s/division). Once the trace is triggered by the external contact to the recorder, it will shift to high speed (25 millisecond/division). The recorder will continue recording, generating a new file every 3 hours3.472222e-5 days 8.333333e-4 hours 4.960317e-6 weeks 1.1415e-6 months . The recorder may be stopped at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton. Stopping the recorder will transfer the data file to the recorders internal memory and the inserted compact flash card (if applicable).

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. Definitions of terms for the Incore movable detectors:

Stored: Shielded storage location in the wall of the Incore Seal Table Room, or the bottom of the Reactor Vessel.

Withdrawn: Located at the withdrawal limit switch at the Incore Detector Drive(s).

Parked: Located in a stationary position anywhere between the Incore Detector Drive motors and the Reactor Core.

2. Manual operation of the detector drives may be utilized provided that the detectors are not withdrawn past the drive respective zero as indicated on the associated DETECTOR POSITION indications.

3. Flux mapping operations should only be performed while reactor is at a nearly constant power level. Neutron flux variations should be kept to less than 5% per hour/or as directed by a QNE.

4. A work group may be in containment provided all Containment Access Procedure steps for MIDS operation are adhered to/enforced.

5. Steps of this procedure may be repeated as necessary.

4

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. MAIN BODY NOTE F.1. will align the radiation monitor, set the detectors to bottom of core for heatup, plant computer and recorders.

F.2. will perform Incore Detector Operability.

F.3. will perform a Full Core Flux Map.

F.4. will restore the system.

Attachment A directs normal incore operation.

Attachment B directs incore troubleshooting.

Attachment C directs emergency/common passes.

Attachment D removes/restores a 5-path from rotating.

NOTE For troubleshooting the IC system, use any applicable steps and data sheets as directed by the Unit Supervisor or Reactor Engineering.

NOTE Steps may be N/A by the Unit Supervisor or Reactor Engineer as conditions warrant.

NOTE Disabling the Audible Alarm Capability of the General Atomics RM-11 in the Control Room may be necessary to reduce the possibility of the RM-11 overloading the Radiation Monitor System Computer during flux mapping. This is due to frequent alarms from

_RE-AR003, Incore Seal Table Room.

NOTE If a zero is inserted into channel item 16, the channel will be inoperable. If a one is inserted into channel item 16, the channel will be operable.

5

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 1. ALIGN the rad monitor, plant computer, loose parts, and recorders per the following steps:

a. Defeat Alarms

1) VERIFY/ PERFORM the following to remove the audible alarm capability of the detector 4AS303/5AS303 (U1/U2 incore seal table detector) on the General Atomics RM-11 in the main control room.

a) PLACE the RM-11 in SUPERVISOR Mode.

b) SELECT grid four on the RM-11.

c) On the keypad, TYPE 4303/5303 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton (this will cue up the U1/U2 incore seal table detector).

d) PUSH the CHANNEL ITEM pushbutton on the RM-11.

e) On the keypad, TYPE 16 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton.

f) NOTIFY Unit NSO, the opposite Unit NSO, and Unit Supervisor of expected alarm on the RM-11 due to the next step.

g) On the keypad, TYPE 0 and PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.

h) PLACE the RM-11 to NORMAL mode.

NOTE Ensure proper coverage per TRM 3.3.d prior to defeating alarms in the following step.

2) VERIFY/PERFORM the following to disable Loose Parts Alarms:

a) ENTER TRM LCO 3.3.d for the 1VE-LM003 and 1VE-LM004.

b) At 1PA44J, PLACE the ALM ENABLE/DEFEAT Switch to ALM DEFEAT for:

1VE-LM003 1VE-LM004 6

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use NOTE Attachment A provides guidance on how to operate the Incore Drive System. Refer to these steps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

NOTE If a problem occurs during Incore operations that require troubleshooting, refer to Attachment B of this procedure.

NOTE If an individual Drive Selector Switch is in the OFF position, that drive will not operate.

NOTE If a detector cannot be withdrawn from storage, use ATTACHMENT D to allow access to the appropriate Drive's 10 path.

F. 1. b. VERIFY/WITHDRAW the operable incore detectors per Attachment A to allow for warm-up of detector.

c. PERFORM ATTACHMENT D for any operable detectors that cannot be withdrawn (N/A if all withdrew).

7

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 1. d. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the following switch configurations on the DETECTOR CONTROL panels for each operable detector. (This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

1) PLACE the OPERATION SELECTOR switches in NORMAL for all known operable detectors.

2) PLACE the OPERATION SELECTOR switches in OFF for all known inoperable detectors.

3) PLACE PATH SELECTOR switch to locations of highest relative power (Desired Paths). If the thimble listed is not available, a different thimble that is as close to the center of the core as possible may be used (Make note in table below).

PATH SELECTOR SWITCHES Alternative Path Detector Desired Path (N/A if not used)

A Path 5 B Path 5 C Path 1 D Path 1 E Path 8 F Path 1

e. INSERT all operable detectors to the bottom of the core per Attachment A to start the 30 minute warm-up. (This step may be N/A if flux map data is not required.)

Warm-Up Start Time 8

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 1. f. INITIALIZE the Flux Map Storage on the process computer, zeroing out all the previous passes, by performing the following: (This step may be N/A if flux map data is not required.)

1) On the PPC Main Menu screen SELECT Operator Demandable.

2) On the Operator Demandable screen SELECT Moveable Detectors (Flux Mapping).

3) On the Flux Mapping Traverse screen SELECT Create New Map.

4) ENTER the following data on the Flux Mapping new Map Data window (Data may be obtained from Reactor Engineering):

Description Map number Reactor Power (%)

Burnup (MWD/MTU)

5) SELECT Create.

NOTE Subsections of this step may be re-performed as necessary to properly setup the paperless recorders.

g. IF required by Reactor Engineering, PERFORM the following to VERIFY the paperless recorders are setup to record flux map data: (Parts of this step may be N/A if flux map data is not required.)

1) VERIFY that a 2-4Gb Compact Flash Card is in the recorders being used.

2) PRESS the green START button on the recorder to begin basic recording. (This starts the recording in slow speed at a rate of 10 hour1.157407e-4 days 0.00278 hours 1.653439e-5 weeks 3.805e-6 months s/division.)

3) VERIFY light located on the electronic recorders control panel is green.

9

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 2. PERFORM Incore Detector Operability.

NOTE Attachment A provides guidance on how to operate the Incore Drive System. Refer to these steps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

NOTE If a problem occurs during Incore operations that require troubleshooting, refer to Attachment B of this procedure.

NOTE If section F.2 has been performed within the past 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months and the plant has remained stable, F.2.a. through F.2.e may be marked N/A.

a. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the following switch configurations on the COMMON CONTROLS panel.

1) COMPUTER switch in OFF.

2) MAIN POWER switch in ON.

3) AUTO-MANUAL switch in AUTO.

4) SPEED switch in LOW.

5) DRIVE SELECTOR switch in ALL.

10

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 2. b. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the following configurations on the DETECTOR READOUT panels for each operable detector. (This step may be N/A if flux map data is not required).

1) PLACE EXTERNAL RECORD switch in REC.

2) VERIFY/ADJUST RECORDER POTENTIOMETER Readings to values as listed below or as directed by the System Engineer.

Unit 1 A - 2.01 B - 2.01 C - 1.75 D - 1.99 E - 1.98 F - 1.45 Unit 2 A - 2.02 B - 1.51 C - 1.98 D - 2.00 E - 2.02 F - 2.02

3) RECORD RECORDER POTENTIOMETER settings in the table below if they differ from the above. (N/A if above settings are used)

A- B- C- D- E- F-

c. VERIFY 30 minute warm up complete.

(Warm up time complete) 30 minutes + time from Step F.1.e.

(This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

d. PERFORM a Detector Operating Voltage Determination/Check with the following steps: (This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

1) DEPRESS the SCAN pushbutton on the Common Controls Panel to scan all operable detectors to the top of the core.

2) OBSERVE/DETERMINE the location of the highest Relative Neutron Flux.

3) PLACE AUTO-MANUAL switch on the COMMON CONTROLS panel to MANUAL.

4) PLACE recorders in service.

a) INSERT Compact Flash Card and VERIFY boot program is complete for the paperless recorders (N/A if not used or previously performed per step F.1.g.).

b) VERIFY light located on the electronic recorders panel is green.

11

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 2. d. 5) PLACE the INSERT-OFF-WITHDRAW switch on the COMMON CONTROLS panel to WITHDRAW to drive the operable detectors into the core until the detectors reach their approximate maximum flux value.

6) ADJUST the RANGE switch as necessary to ensure the strip chart recorders remain on scale.

7) RECORD the As Found voltage setting for each operable detector.

As Found Voltages Detector A V Detector D V Detector B V Detector E V Detector C V Detector F V

8) SET each operable detector's voltage to approximately 0 volts to determine the recorders pen moves.

9) ADJUST each operable voltage to 80 volts.

10) RECORD % full scale of recorders on Table 1.

11) INCREASE each operable detector's voltage by approximately 10 volts.

12) RECORD % full scale of recorders on Table 1.

13) REPEAT previous two steps until each operable detector's voltage is approximately 150 volts. FILL in the data on Table 1 for each 10-volt increment.

Table 1 Moveable Incore Detectors Operability Check A % Full B % Full C % Full D % Full E % Full F % Full Detector Scale of Scale of Scale of Scale of Scale of Scale of Voltage Recorder Recorder Recorder Recorder Recorder Recorder 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 12

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 2. d. 14) From the data recorded in step above, SELECT a range of approximately 20 volts where the detector output varies the least.

Detector A _________ V to _________ V Detector B _________ V to _________ V Detector C _________ V to _________ V Detector D _________ V to _________ V Detector E _________ V to _________ V Detector F _________ V to _________ V

15) RECORD the midpoint of this range and have an Independent Verification of the results.

Detector Midpoint IV A __________ V B __________ V C __________ V D __________ V E __________ V F __________ V

16) ADJUST Operating Voltages for each operable detector to the midpoint value specified in the previous step.

Detector Adjusted Midpoint Initial/Date A __________ V ___________/_______

B __________ V ___________/_______

C __________ V ___________/_______

D __________ V ___________/_______

E __________ V ___________/_______

F __________ V ___________/_______

17) RECORD the time and date the Detector Operating Voltage Determination/Check was completed.

Time: ___________ Date: ___________

e. On each individual control ROTATE the current selector switch through each current position. (This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

13

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use NOTE Step F.3. will perform a full core flux map. If it is desired to perform a partial, quarter or a QPTR flux map then transition to the applicable T-sheet at step F.3.d. of this procedure.

BwOP IC-9T3 directs a partial flux map.

BwOP IC-9T4 directs a quarter flux map.

BwOP IC-9T5 directs a QPTR flux map.

F. 3. PERFORM a FULL CORE Flux Map by performing the following:

a. VERIFY/PERFORM the following at the COMMON CONTROLS panel:

1) AUTO-MANUAL switch in AUTO.

2) PUSH WITHDRAW pushbutton to withdraw all operable detectors to the withdrawn position.

3) COMPUTER Switch in ON.

4) VERIFY light located on the electronic recorders panel is green.

14

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use NOTE BwOP IC-9 Attachment A is a reference step on how to operate the Incore Drive System under normal conditions. Refer to the appropriate substeps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

F. 3. b. RECORD the following information prior to the Flux Map:

(This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

SBA ______ SBB ______ SBC ______ SBD ______ SBE ______

CBA ______ CBB ______ CBC ______ CBD ______

Unit: Cycle:

Time: Date:

Power: % Flux map ID #:

c. Reason for taking map or using the system:

Monthly Surveillance.

Incore/Excore Calibration.

PDMS Calibration.

System Checkout.

Troubleshooting.

Other, specify:

d. VERIFY no personnel in Containment, if applicable

e. If performing a full core flux map continue with the next step, otherwise transition to the applicable T-sheet:

BwOP IC-9T3 directs a partial flux map.

BwOP IC-9T4 directs a quarter flux map.

BwOP IC-9T5 directs a QPTR flux map.

15

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. f. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 1.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

--(J-10) 1 (D-10) 1 (G-9) 1 (J-7) 1 (K-12) 1 (D-8)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Power Range Channel Data Table if reactor power 5% or COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5% (N/A if not applicable).

16

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3 f. RECORD NIS POWER RANGE CHANNEL DATA (N/A if < 5%

power or deemed not necessary by RE):

Detector Currents (Ma) and Percent Power Pass Channel 41 Channel 42 Channel 43 Channel 44

//////// Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q 1

Delta Flux (%) (MCB Meters and Computer) 10 Minute Pass Calorimetric

_NI-41C _NI-42C _NI-43C _NI-44C

Power (%)

1

//////// CH 41 CH 42 CH 43 CH 44 ///////////////////

1 ///////////////////

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 1 17

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. g. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 2.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal 2 (R-11) 1 (H-15) --(J-10) 2 (R-8) 2 (F-14) 2 (H-2)

OFF * (U2)

Capped per EC 391242 (A2R16)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power

<5% (N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 2 18

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. h. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 3.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal 2 (K-2) 2 (A-11) --(J-10) 3 (B-8) 3 (H-4) 3 (B-3)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 3 19

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. i. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 4.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal 3 (L-10) (U1) 3 (K-6) 3 (C-5) --(J-10) 4 (M-7) 4 (L-15)

OFF * (U2)

Capped per EC 391242 (A2R16)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 4 20

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. j. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 5.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal 4 (P-4) 4 (F-1) 4 (B-13) 4 (L-13) --(J-10) 5 (N-6)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 5 21

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. k. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 6.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate 5 (H-6) 5 (F-7) 5 (H-11) 5 (N-4) 5 (N-13) -- (J-10)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Power Range Channel Data Table if reactor power 5% or COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%. (N/A if not applicable.)

22

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. k. RECORD NIS POWER RANGE CHANNEL DATA (N/A if < 5%

power or deemed not necessary by RE):

Detector Currents (Ma) and Percent Power Pass Channel 41 Channel 42 Channel 43 Channel 44

//////// Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q 6

Delta Flux (%) (MCB Meters and Computer) 10 Minute Pass Calorimetric

_NI-41C _NI-42C _NI-43C _NI-44C

Power (%)

6

//////// CH 41 CH 42 CH 43 CH 44 ///////////////////

6 ///////////////////

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 6 23

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. l. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 7.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

--(J-10) 6 (R-6) 6 (J-14) 6 (D-14) 6 (J-8) 6 (G-12)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 7 24

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. m. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 8.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal 6 (D-12) --(J-10) 7 (J-1) 7 (G-5) 7 (C-7) 7 (A-9)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 8 25

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. n. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 9.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal 7 (B-6) 7 (N-14) --(J-10) 8 (D-3) 8 (F-8) 8 (P-9)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 9 26

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. o. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 10.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal 8 (E-9) 8 (N-2) 8 (L-8) --(J-10) 9 (C-8) 9 (N-8)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 10 27

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. p. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 11.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal 9 (H-3) 9 (H-13) 9 (F-3) 10 (L-11) --(J-10) 1 (D-8)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%

(N/A if not applicable).

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 11 28

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. q. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 12.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:

A B C D E F Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate 10 (L-5) 10 (E-11) 10 (E-5) 1 (J-7) 1 (K-12) --(J-10)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Power Range Channel Data Table if reactor power 5% or COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%. (N/A if not applicable.)

29

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 3. q. RECORD NIS POWER RANGE CHANNEL DATA (N/A if < 5%

power or deemed not necessary by RE):

Detector Currents (Ma) and Percent Power Pass Channel 41 Channel 42 Channel 43 Channel 44

//////// Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q 12 Delta Flux (%) (MCB Meters and Computer) 10 Minute Pass Calorimetric

_NI-41C _NI-42C _NI-43C _NI-44C

Power (%)

12

//////// CH 41 CH 42 CH 43 CH 44 ///////////////////

12 ///////////////////

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5%

power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Reactivity Computer Pico Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36 Ammeter Reading (If applicable) 12

r. PERFORM any required Emergency/Common passes per Attachment C.

s. CIRCLE all locations that could not be mapped on FIGURE 1 of this procedure.

t. VERIFY/PLACE the Computer Switch to the OFF position.

u. COMPLETE ATTACHMENT D for all drives that could not be withdrawn from storage.

v. POSITION Incore detectors per the applicable sections of Attachment A as required:

VERIFY/INSERT all operable detectors to the bottom of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE all operable Detectors into storage.

PLACE in location as directed by Shift Manager or designee.

30

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 4. System Restoration:

a. VERIFY/ PERFORM the following to restore the audible alarm capability of the detector 4AS303/5AS303 (U1/U2 incore seal table detector) on the General Atomics RM-11 in the main control room.

1) PLACE the RM-11 in SUPERVISOR Mode.

2) SELECT grid four on the RM-11.

3) On the keypad, TYPE 4303/5303 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton (this will cue up the U1/U2 incore seal table detector).

4) PUSH the CHANNEL ITEM pushbutton on the RM-11.

5) On the keypad, TYPE 16 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton.

6) On the keypad, TYPE 1 and PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.

7) PLACE the RM-11 to NORMAL mode.

b. VERIFY/PERFORM the following to restore Loose Parts Alarms:

1) At 1PA44J, PLACE the ALARM ENABLE/DEFEAT switch to ALM ENABLE for:

1VE-LM003 1VE-LM004

2) EXIT TRM LCO 3.3.d for restored channels.

c. REMOVE the Compact Flash Card(s) from the recorder(s) if directed by Reactor Engineering.

d. ALIGN the IC panel per the Shift Manager or designee.

e. ATTACH completed BwOP IC-9T3, 9T4, or 9T5 sheets (as applicable).

f. FORWARD copies of any BwOP IC-9, 9T3, 9T4, 9T5, which were used to Reactor Engineering.

31

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use MOVABLE INCORE DETECTORS CORE LOCATIONS FIGURE 1 R P N M L K J H G F E D C B A 1 C7 B4 2 B8 A2 F2 3 A9 C9 D8 F3 4 A4 D5 E3 5 A1 D7 C10 C3 6 B6 F5 B3 A5 A7 7 E4 D1 B5 E7 8 C2 F9 C8 E6 E8 F1 E9 D3 9 F8 C1 A8 F7 10 A3* CP B1 11 D2* D1 C5 B10 B2 12 E1 F6 A6 13 E5 D4 B9 C4 14 B7 C6 E2 D6 15 F4 A1 NORMAL MODE FLUX THIMBLE LOCATIONS In this case, there is one to one thimble to detector correspondence (i.e., thimble letter equals detector letter and number corresponds to detector path selector numbers).

CP - Calibration Path

Unit 2 only, L10 and R11 Capped for Cycle 17 per EC 391242 (A2R16) 32

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A NORMAL INCORE OPERATIONS Perform the applicable step to operate the Incore System as directed in BwOP IC-9.

NOTE Step A will WITHDRAW Detectors from Storage.

Step B INSERT Detectors to the bottom of the core Step C will SCAN detectors from the bottom of the core to the top of the core Step D will RECORD and move detectors from the top the core to the bottom of the core Step E will WITHDRAW the Detectors from the bottom of the core to the fully withdrawn position Step F will place Detectors in STORAGE.

Step G will manually operate a detector or detectors.

A. To WITHDRAW Detectors from Storage, PERFORM the following:

1) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be placed in the WITHDRAW position.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be placed in the WITHDRAW position.

2) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment, if applicable.

3) DEPRESS the WITHDRAW Pushbutton at the Common Control Panel.

4) VERIFY that the Detector(s) fully withdrawn.

5) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to fully withdraw all selected Detectors from Storage (N/A if all detectors were withdrawn).

33

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (Contd)

B. To INSERT Detectors to the bottom of the core, PERFORM the following:

1) VERIFY that the Detectors to be inserted are in the FULLY WITHDRAWN position.

2) For each Detector to be inserted, PERFORM the following at each Detector Control Panel:

a) SET the OPERATION SELECTOR Switch to the desired position.

b) SET the PATH SELECTOR Switch to the desired position.

3) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be inserted to the bottom of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be inserted to the bottom of the core.

4) IF an emergency or common pass is required, VERIFY/UPDATE the EMERGENCY/COMMON/STORAGE limits for the associated drive per the Incore System Operator Aid.

5) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment, if applicable.

6) DEPRESS the INSERT Pushbutton on the Common Control Panel.

7) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) in the bottom of core position.

8) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors in the bottom of the core (N/A if all detectors were inserted).

34

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (Contd)

C. To SCAN detectors from the bottom of the core to the top of the core, PERFORM the following:

1) VERIFY that the Detectors to be scanned are at the bottom of the core position.

2) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be scanned to the top of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be scanned to the top of the core.

3) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment.

4) DEPRESS the SCAN Pushbutton on the Common Control Panel.

5) VERIFY/ADJUST detector range to keep sensor output onscale of recorder (N/A if recorder not used).

6) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) at the top of core position.

7) REPEAT the previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors in the top of the core (N/A if all detectors were scanned).

35

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (Contd)

D. To RECORD and move detectors from the top of the core to the bottom of the core, PERFORM the following:

1) VERIFY that the Detectors to be recorded are at the top of the core position.

2) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to record and move to the bottom of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to record and move to the bottom of the core.

3) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment.

4) DEPRESS the RECORD Pushbutton on the Common Control Panel.

a) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) at the bottom of core position.

b) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors in the bottom of the core (N/A if all detectors were recorded).

E. To WITHDRAW the Detectors from the bottom of the core to the FULLY WITHDRAWN position, PERFORM the following:

1) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be fully withdrawn.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be fully withdrawn.

2) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment.

3) DEPRESS the WITHDRAW Pushbutton, at the Common Controls Panel.

4) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) fully withdrawn.

5) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to withdraw individual Detectors (N/A if all detectors were withdrawn).

36

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (Contd)

NOTE The Incore Detectors may be considered fully inserted into storage when the Encoder position is within 12 inches of the higher value of the two storage limits.

F. To place Detectors in Storage, PERFORM the following:

1) For each Detector to be placed in Storage, PERFORM the following at the Associated Detector Control Panel:

a) VERIFY that the Detector is fully withdrawn.

b) PLACE the OPERATION SELECTOR Switch to the STORAGE Position

2) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be placed in storage.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be placed in storage.

3) IF the EMERGENCY/COMMON/STORAGE limits have been changed for execution of common or emergency passes, THEN VERIFY/UPDATE the limits for storage using the Incore System Operator Aid.

4) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment.

5) DEPRESS the INSERT Pushbutton at the Common Controls Panel.

6) VERIFY that the Detector(s) STOP at the Storage Lower Limit.

7) DEPRESS the SCAN Pushbutton at the Common Controls Panel.

8) VERIFY that each Detector STOPS at the Storage Upper Limit.

9) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors into Storage (N/A if all detectors were placed into storage).

37

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A (Contd)

NOTE Manual operation of the detector may be utilized provided that the detectors are not withdrawn past 0.0 inches as indicated on the associated DETECTOR POSITION indications.

G. To manually operate a detector or detectors, PERFORM the following:

1) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be manually operated.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be manually operated.

2) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment.

3) VERIFY/PLACE the AUTO/MANUAL Switch in the MANUAL position.

4) INSERT OR WITHDRAW the detector(s) as necessary using the INSERT-OFF-WITHDRAW Switch.

5) VERIFY/PLACE the AUTO/MANUAL Switch in the AUTO position.

6) VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if desired (otherwise N/A this step).

38

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B INCORE TROUBLESHOOTING The following is a list of potential problems that, although unlikely, may occur. This is not intended to be an all-inclusive list.

NOTE If any problems occur that are outside of those listed, please contact a member of the Reactor Engineering Department.

NOTE If during Insert, Scan, or Record, the appropriate button does not extinguish and the detector(s) has ceased movement, the detector(s) may not have reached its limit due to blockage in the thimble tube.

NOTE Do NOT attempt to unblock a path that was previously identified as being blocked without Operations Management approval.

Attempting to unblock a path can lead to the loss of detector function or other system capabilities due to unavailable 10-paths. Authorized attempts should consider what affect losing a detector and associated equipment have on the system, as well as required equipment per TLCO 3.3.a. A list of previously identified blocked paths can be found in the Incore Limits Operator Aid.

39

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B (Contd)

PROBLEM SOLUTION RNO Blocked thimble. Try to clear blockage per Step 1. Refer to step 1.i.

Path light does not Follow actions of Step 2. Contact an RE.

illuminate.

5 or 10 path does not Wait for rotation to continue to Contact RE if excessive rotation stop on selected path. selected position. occurs (>5 rotations).

Contact RE if withdrawn light is lit 5 or 10 path does not Verify detector withdrawn light is and excessive time has elapsed rotate. lit. Wait for rotation.

(>5 min).

VERIFY more than 1 drive is not STOP light Check all drive selectors are selected to the same location.

illuminates. selected to the proper position.

Contact RE.

Fluxmap data not Contact NIS.

being received.

Go to manual and individual drive Withdraw light not and Insert/Withdraw in Low Contact an RE.

illuminated Speed

1. To attempt to clear blockage in the thimble tube, PERFORM the following:

a. DEPRESS the stop button, and DETERMINE which detector has not reached its limit.

b. SELECT the detector, which has not reached its limit, on the Common Controls Panel.

c. PLACE the AUTO/MANUAL switch to MANUAL.

d. SELECT the SPEED switch to HIGH.

e. PLACE the INSERT/OFF/WITHDRAW Switch in WITHDRAW for the detector and WITHDRAW the detector about 20 inches.

f. PLACE the INSERT/OFF/WITHDRAW Switch in INSERT for the detector and INSERT the detector until the limit is reached, the detector stops, or the detector passes the point of blockage.

g. Repeat steps 1.e & f for a maximum of 3 times

h. TAKE the AUTO/MANUAL switch back to AUTO.

40

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT B (Contd)

1. i. PERFORM one of the following:

If the blockage has NOT been cleared, THEN PERFORM the following:

1) DEPRESS Withdraw on the common control panel.

2) ONCE the detector is withdrawn, PLACE the PATH SELECTOR for that drive to OFF.

3) PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position. If one of the drives is off, the path selector light for that drive will be extinguished.

4) SELECT the speed switch to LOW.

5) Return to step in effect.

IF the blockage has been cleared, THEN PERFORM the following:

1) PLACE the DRIVER SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position.

2) SELECT the speed switch to LOW.

3) PUSH the INSERT or SCAN pushbutton to reinsert or rescan with the detector.

4) Return to step in effect.

2. IF the correct number of path lights does not illuminate on the common panel, there may be a problem with the indication microswitch.

a. VERIFY that all detectors being inserted have a flux indication on scan.

b. IF there is no flux indication after about 50 inches of scan, STOP the trace and CONTACT a Reactor Engineer.

41

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT C EMERGENCY/COMMON PASS NOTE BwOP IC-9 Attachment A is a reference step on how to operate the Incore Drive System. Refer to the appropriate substeps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

NOTE Copy additional forms of this attachment as needed for each Emergency/Common pass.

1. RECORD As Found Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits for the detector(s) being used (N/A for detectors not used):

Emergency/Common/Storage "As Found" Limits Detector A B C D E F Top Bottom Calibrate "As Found" Limits Detector A B C D E F Top Bottom

2. VERIFY/UPDATE Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits for the drive utilizing the Incore Operator Aid, if applicable.

3. RECORD the Emergency pass positions required by the Reactor Engineering Group in Step 4.

42

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT C (Contd)

4. PLACE a check () when complete for the Emergency/Common Pass.

RECORD Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as determined by Reactor Engineering as follows:

A B C D E F PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment, if applicable.

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.

(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

RECORD required data (Pass # , Detector and ten path position, on the paperless recorder between traces per BwOP IC-9, Attachment B or enter the time of the pass in the adjacent box).

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits changed? (Yes/No).

PERFORM next step if limits were changed, otherwise N/A next step.

5. IF the map is complete, RESTORE Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits, to the "As Found" limits or per the Incore Operator Aid. N/A if more emergency passes are to be completed.

a. RETURN to BwOP IC-9 procedure and step in effect.

43

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT D REMOVING/RESTORING A 5-PATH FROM ROTATING NOTE The following section is to be used to allow access to the ten paths of drives, which have detectors that cannot be withdrawn. This section can be marked "N/A" if no leads are to be lifted.

NOTE Removal of the 5-path transfer relay per the steps below will ensure that the 5-path will not rotate.

NOTE Copy this Appendix for each Drive that CANNOT be withdrawn from storage.

NOTE Steps 1 through 5 will disable a 5-Path from turning to support mapping. Steps 6 through 12 will return the system to the as found configuration.

1. REMOVE a 5-PATH from operation for all Drives that cannot be withdrawn from storage by lifting leads in the following steps:

a. LIST the Drive(s) for which a lead is being lifted.

b. NOTIFY the Shift Manager that the lead(s), and relay(s) for the Drive(s) listed in 1.a. will be lifted.

44

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT D (Contd)

1. c. CIRCLE the lead(s), and relay(s) to be lifted from the list below:

Lead Relay Drive A TB3-11 K90A Drive B TB7-11 K91A Drive C TB19-11 K92A Drive D TB23-11 K93A Drive E TB26-14 K94A Drive F TB29-14 K95A

2. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the Operation Selector switch for each applicable drive to the STORAGE position at its Detector Control panel.

3. REMOVE the 5-path transfer motor relay(s) circled in Step 1.c from the rear of the

_PM08J panel (Access Key 69).

VERIFICATION _____

4. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the Operation Selector switch for each applicable drive to the OFF position at its Detector Control panel. The Storage lamp will extinguish.

CAUTION The lead(s) to be lifted are energized with 120V AC.

5. LIFT the lead(s) circled in Step 1.c, located in the rear of the _PM08J panel.

VERIFICATION _____

45

BwOP IC-9 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT D (Contd)

NOTE Steps 6 through 12 are to be used to reconnect any leads lifted in step 5.

6. RESTORE a 5-PATH to operation for all Drives that cannot be withdrawn from storage by lifting leads in the following steps:

7. LIST the Drive(s) for which a lead is being landed.

8. RECONNECT all leads that were lifted in step 5 of this attachment as specified below:

Lead Drive A TB3-11 Drive B TB7-11 Drive C TB19-11 Drive D TB23-11 Drive E TB26-14 Drive F TB29-14 VERIFICATION _____

9. VERIFY/SELECT STORAGE on the Operation Selector switch for the applicable drive at its Detector Control Panel.

10. VERIFY Storage lamp is ILLUMINATED.

11. REPLACE all motor relay(s) that were removed in step 5 as specified below:

Relay Drive A K90A Drive B K91A Drive C K92A Drive D K93A Drive E K94A Drive F K95A VERIFICATION _____

12. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the Operation Selector switch as desired by the Shift Manager or designee. System interlocks should not allow operation of the 5-path transfer motor with the detector inserted.

(Final) 46

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO.

2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5.

3. 1PR01J is currently operable, but is scheduled to be taken OOS for maintenance next shift.

4. A Unit 1 containment release is scheduled in anticipation of the 1PR01J outage.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor has handed you a Containment release package G-13-001, completed through section D, and has directed you to perform Section E using the containment mini-purge exhaust fan and BwOP VQ-6 to reduce Containment pressure to between 0.0 and 0.1 psig. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.

2. An Equipment Operator is standing by to obtain the 1FI-VQ009 flowrate Page 1 of 5 SIM-805

TASK TITLE: Perform a Containment Mini-Purge Release JPM No.: SIM-805 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.VQ-02 K&A No.: 029000 A2.03 TASK No.: R-VQ-006, Start the containment mini-purge sys. K&A IMP: 2.7/3.1 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

EVALUATOR: DATE:

The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED:

FAILED TIME FINISHED:

JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 6, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION:

X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL

REFERENCES:

1. BwOP VQ-6 Rev. 21, Containment Mini Purge System Operation

2. RP-BR-980, Rev 12, Containment Vent And Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents MATERIALS:

1. BwOP VQ-6 Containment Mini Purge System Operation

2. RP-BR-980, Rev 12, Containment Vent And Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents TASK STANDARDS:

1. Complete Section E.2. a-f of Containment Release Form in accordance with RP-BR-980.

2. Correctly align and start containment mini purge system.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO.

2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1.

3. 1PR01J is currently operable, but is scheduled to be taken OOS for maintenance next shift.

4. A Unit 1 containment release is scheduled in anticipation of the 1PR01J outage.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor has handed you a Containment release package G-13-001, completed through section D, and has directed you to perform Section E using the containment mini purge exhaust fan and BwOP VQ-6 to reduce Containment pressure to between 0.0 and 0.1 psig. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.

2. An Equipment Operator is standing by to obtain the 1FI-VQ009 flowrate Page 2 of 5 SIM-805

RECORD START TIME Note: Provide the examinee with a copy of RP-BR-980 through Step D and BwOP VQ-6.

When requested by the examinee, Independent Verification has been completed.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable

1. Refer to partially completed RP-

Open RP-BR-980 SAT UNSAT N/A BR-980, Section E.2 Comments:

REVIEW the applicable CUE: Prerequisites, Prerequisites, Precautions, Precautions, Limitations and Limitations and and Actions are met. Actions.

2. RECORD the affected

Record 1 in the affected SAT UNSAT N/A containment number. containment blank. Comments:

Initial and date operator blank.

CUE: US has initialed and dated the SRO blank.

Request SRO initial and date SRO blank.

3. RECORD the affected

Record affected SAT UNSAT N/A containment pressure. containment pressure in Comments:

blank.

Initial and date operator blank.

4. Ensure HVAC requirements are

Verify 0VA02CA or CB is SAT UNSAT N/A still in effect. running. Comments:

Initial and date the operator blank

5. Refer to BwOP VQ-6

Open BwOP VQ-6. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

REVIEW the applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, CUE: Prerequisites, and Limitations and Precautions, Limitations Actions.

and Actions are met.

Determine step 8 is applicable.

Page 3 of 5 SIM-805

6*. Open mini purge containment

At 0PM02J: SAT UNSAT N/A isolation valves. Comments:

Open 1VQ005A

Open 1VQ005B

Open 1VQ005C

7. Record the time the valves were

Record the current time. SAT UNSAT N/A open on RP-BR-980 step E.2.d. Comments:

Initial and date the operator blank 8*. Start Mini Purge Exhaust Fan.

At 0PM02J, start 1VQ05C SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

9. Record the time the fan was

Record the current time. SAT UNSAT N/A started on RP-BR-980 step E.2.e. Comments:

Initial and date the operator blank CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM.

RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:

Page 4 of 5 SIM-805

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-805 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): ANY MALFUNCTION #S: N/A COMMENTS:

1. RP-BR-980 needs to be filled out through section D.

2. Verify 0VA02CA or CB is running.

3. Raise containment pressure to > 0.3 psig with main containment purge supply system.

4. Place Release in Progress placard on 0PM02J Page 5 of 5 SIM-805

PROCEDURE BwOP VQ-6 UNIT NO. REVISION NO.

21 BRAIDWOOD STATION PROCEDURE TITLE:

CONTAINMENT MINI-PURGE SYSTEM OPERATION Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 21 Reinstate Step F.1 clarification that was inadvertently PCRA 1292723-02 dropped from Rev 19.

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use CONTAINMENT MINI-PURGE SYSTEM OPERATION A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY This procedure describes the steps required to startup and shutdown the Containment Mini-Purge System.

B. REFERENCES

1. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP VQ-M1/M2, Mechanical Lineup.

b. BwOP VQ-E1/E2, Electrical Lineup.

c. RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents.

d. RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J Inoperable.

e. _BwOSR 3.6.3.2, Cnmt Ventilation 8" Purge Sup/Exh Isol Weekly Surv.

2. Station Drawing: M-105, Containment Purge System.

3. Tech Specs:

a. 3.6.4.

b. 3.6.5.

c. 3.6.3.

d. 3.9.4.

4. UFSAR Sections:

a. 9.4.9.

b. 11.5.2.

5. Westinghouse PLS.

6. Station Commitment: 456-402-91-00100, Precaution on Spent Fuel Pool Impact.

1

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use C. PREREQUISITES

1. The system is lined up in accordance with BwOP VQ-M1/M2.

2. The system is lined up in accordance with BwOP VQ-E1/E2.

3. NOTIFY the Radiation Protection Department that this procedure is being performed and the purpose of the performance and verify that the filter will not be changed in _PR01J during release.

4. Either of the following may be used to perform the Containment Release:

RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents

(_PR01J OPERABLE).

RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J INOPERABLE.

5. _PR28J must be OPERABLE if the containment release is being performed using RP-BR-932 with _PR01J INOPERABLE.

D. PRECAUTIONS

Startup and Shutdown of the Containment Mini-Purge System may impact Spent Fuel Pool Level if the Spent Fuel Pool is connected to the Refueling Cavity via the Transfer Canal. If the "Spent Fuel Pit Level High Low" annunciator is not operable, direct communications between the Control Room and the Spent Fuel Pool MUST be maintained until conditions stabilize.

2

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. When any system valves of Containment Mini-Purge lines are open in MODE 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3, or are open during core alterations or movement of irradiated fuel within the containment in accordance with Tech Spec 3.9.4:

a. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions.

b. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be functioning.

c. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory limits.

2. Containment internal pressure shall be maintained between -0.1 and +1.0 psig in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.4.

3. Containment maximum temperature shall not exceed 120°F in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 per Tech Spec 3.6.5.

4. IF Containment temperature is less than 70°F with the SI Accumulators pressurized, VERIFY _BwOS SI-1a is entered.

5. Refer to Attachment A of this procedure if _PR01J alarms during a containment release. (N/A if release initiated with RP-BR-932.)

6. The following Containment Mini-Purge valves will close upon a Containment Ventilation Isolation Signal:

a. _VQ003, Mini-Flow to Post LOCA Purge Isol Vlv.

b. _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.

c. _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

d. _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

e. _VQ004A, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.

f. _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.

7. All references to _BwOSR 3.6.3.2 are not applicable in Modes 5 or 6, and recording data is not required in these modes.

8. Containment pressure should be less than 0.3 psig prior to starting the _VQ04C, Mini-Purge Supply Fan to allow forward flow.

3

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. MAIN BODY CAUTION If _PR01J becomes inoperable during the release, IMMEDIATELY suspend the release. The release may still be performed if initiated with RP-BR-932.

NOTE Steps 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 can be performed independent of each other.

Steps 4 and 5: Purge the Containment with No Mini-Purge Fans.

Steps 6 and 7: Operate Containment Mini-Purge Supply Fans.

Steps 8 and 9: Operate Containment Mini-Purge Exhaust Fans.

Step 10: Performs an Extended Purge of Containment (feed and bleed).

1. VERIFY either of the following is approved by the Shift Manager or designee:

(N/A if only supply fans are to be run):

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

NOTE If taking credit for VA Charcoal Booster and FHB Charcoal Booster Fans, then the opposite units VA Exhaust Fan should be shutdown to prevent a loss of flow up the applicable vent stack.

2. VERIFY when starting Unit 1 Containment Mini-Purge System at least one of the following is in operation. (N/A if only supply fans are to be run).

Unit One Aux Building Exhaust Fan 0VA02CA/B.

One Lab HVAC Fume Hood Exhaust Fan, 0VL02CA/B.

Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA/B/C/D/E/F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA/B).

4

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use NOTE If taking credit for VA Charcoal Booster and FHB Charcoal Booster Fans, then the opposite units VA Exhaust Fan should be shutdown to prevent a loss of flow up the applicable vent stack.

F. 3. VERIFY when starting Unit 2 Containment Mini-Purge System at least one of the following is in operation. (N/A if only supply fans are to be run).

Unit Two Aux Building Exhaust Fan 0VA02CC/D.

One Radwaste Building Exhaust Fan 0VW03CA/B.

Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA/B/C/D/E/F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA/B).

5

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use NOTE The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).

NOTE If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release was initiated with RP-BR-932.)

F. 4. To PURGE Containment with no Mini-Purge Fans, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. RECORD Containment initial pressure on RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents or RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J Inoperable.

b. OPEN _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.

c. OPEN _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

d. OPEN _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

e. RECORD the time when valves were opened and release began on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) 6

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 5. To SECURE/SUSPEND PURGING Containment with no Mini-Purge Fans, perform the following at 0PM02J.

a. CLOSE _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.

b. CLOSE _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

c. CLOSE _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

d. RECORD the time when valves were closed and Release was secured/suspended on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

e. RECORD Containment final pressure on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) 7

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use CAUTION When any system valves of Containment Mini-Purge lines are open in Mode 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3 then:

1. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions.

2. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be functioning.

3. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory limits.

NOTE When starting _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Supply Fan, the Control Switch must be held in the start position until the fan suction damper

_VQ01Y is in the open position. The fan will not start until that interlock is satisfied.

NOTE Notify Radiation Protection to address any radiological concerns when starting Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply when Containment Integrity is set.

NOTE Before proceeding with the next step, Containment Pressure should be less than 0.3 psig to allow forward flow.

NOTE The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).

8

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use NOTE If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release initiated with RP-BR-932.)

F. 6. To startup Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. OPEN _VQ004A, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.

b. OPEN _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.

c. START _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini Flow Prg Supply Fan.

d. MONITOR Containment pressure.

7. To SECURE/SUSPEND Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. STOP _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Supply Fan.

b. CLOSE _VQ004A, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.

c. CLOSE _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.

9

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use CAUTION When any system valves of Containment Mini-Purge lines are open in Mode 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3 then:

1. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions.

2. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be functioning.

3. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory limits.

NOTE The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).

NOTE If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release initiated with RP-BR-932.)

F. 8. To Startup Cnmt Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. OPEN _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.

b. OPEN _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

c. OPEN _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

d. RECORD time valves were opened on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

e. START _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan.

10

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 8. f. RECORD start time of fan on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

g. OPERATE Containment Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan as directed by the Unit Supervisor while MONITORING the Containment pressure.

11

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 9. To SECURE/SUSPEND Cnmt Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. STOP _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan.

b. RECORD fan stop time on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

c. CLOSE _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv.

d. CLOSE _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

e. CLOSE _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv.

f. RECORD valve closure time on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

g. RECORD Containment final pressure on the following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) 12

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use F. 10. To perform an Extended Purge (feed and bleed) of Unit _ Containment, perform the following:

CAUTION Containment pressure SHALL be maintained between

- 0.1 and 1.0 psig in Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4.

a. VERIFY/START the Cnmt Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan per Step F.8.

NOTE Before proceeding with the next step, Containment Pressure should be less than 0.3 psig to allow forward flow.

b. START the Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply Fan per Step F.6.

c. WHEN Containment Pressure reaches the desired value, STOP _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan.

d. OPERATE Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply and Exhaust Fans as directed by the Unit Supervisor while monitoring Containment Pressure.

e. SECURE/SUSPEND the Release per Steps F.7 and F.9 when necessary.

13

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use ATTACHMENT A

_PR01J ALARM RESPONSE DURING CONTAINMENT RELEASES NOTE This attachment should only be used if the release was initiated using RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE).

If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM the following as applicable:

If a HIGH Alarm is received on any Channel, PERFORM the following:

1. SECURE the release by performing the applicable steps of this procedure.

2. TERMINATE the release package.

3. NOTIFY Rad Protection that the release has been terminated.

If an ALERT Alarm is received on any Channel, continue to CLOSELY MONITOR the containment release. (The ALERT Alarm is normally set close to the HIGH setpoint to warn the operator that prompt manual action may be required).

If a Communications, Operate, or Equipment Failure has occurred, PERFORM the following:

1. SUSPEND the release by performing the applicable steps of this procedure.

2. Determine the cause of the monitor failure per BwOP AR/PR-11, using the RM-11 Alarm Response Guidelines.

3. If the alarm condition can be cleared and the monitor restored to normal while the unit is in Mode 5, 6 or defueled, then the release may be RESTARTED with Shift Supervisor permission.

4. If the alarm condition CANNOT be cleared, TERMINATE the release package.

(Final) 14

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 1 of 25 Level 1 - Continuous Use CONTAINMENT VENT AND MINI PURGE GASEOUS EFFLUENTS

1. PURPOSE 1.1. This procedure outlines the method to be used to verify that the principal gamma emitting noble gas isotopes, iodine and tritium activities in the Containment Building atmosphere are identified and quantified and dose rates established as required by Technical Specifications.

2. MATERIAL AND SPECIAL EQUIPMENT - NONE

3. PRECAUTIONS, LIMITATIONS, AND PREREQUISITES 3.1. Precautions 3.1.1. If an out-of-spec condition exists (such as exceeding activity limits in step A.5.b.2.,

monitoring equipment failure, etc.) immediately notify the Shift Manager.

3.2. Limitations 3.2.1. Contact Operations to determine if 1(2)PR01J is operable. If 1(2)PR001J is inoperable, then refer to RP-BR-932 for release from containment with 1(2)PR001J inoperable 3.2.2. The limiting condition for operation is met when the principle gamma emitting noble gases, iodine and tritium activities are identified and quantified and the dose rates released in gaseous effluents from the site to areas at or beyond the site boundary are limited to the following (exceeding activity concentrations in A.5.b.2. may indicate these dose limits need to be evaluated by chemistry):

1. Whole body - less than or equal to 500 mrem/yr.

2. Skin - less than or equal to 3000 mrem/yr.

3.2.3. Dose rate calculations for this surveillance shall be performed in accordance with the methodology and parameters in the Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.

3.2.4. This procedure is applicable at all times and in all modes of reactor operation.

3.2.5. The Shift Manager must be notified immediately whenever the limiting condition for operation cannot be met.

3.2.6. In the event an out-of-specification condition exists, immediately notify the Shift Manager to implement the applicable LCOAR procedure.

3.2.7. Use of N/A is allowed when procedure/attachment step is not required.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 2 of 25 3.3. Prerequisites 3.3.1. Attachment 1, Containment Release Form, has been approved by Radiation Protection and the Shift Manager or SRO prior to commencing a containment release.

4. MAIN BODY 4.1. OBTAIN Attachment 1, Containment Release Form. Radiation Protection SHALL assign a Release Number from Attachment 2, Containment Release Log.

4.2. Radiation Protection SHALL OBTAIN all necessary sample results and COMPLETE Section A. The form should be HAND DELIVERED to Chemistry to COMPLETE Section B, unless Section B is not applicable and Chemistry ODCM evaluation is not required. The form should be HAND DELIVERED to Operating to COMPLETE Sections C, D, E and F.

4.3. Following the completion of the release, Attachment 1 will be delivered to Chemistry for completion of Section G. Attachment 1 will be FILED by the Chemistry Department.

5. RETURN TO NORMAL 5.1. This procedure is considered complete and no further action is required when Attachment 1 is properly completed for each release and the dose limits have been met.

6. REFERENCES 6.1. Commitments 6.1.1. Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM).

6.1.2. Technical Specification Section 3.6.3, "Containment Isolation Valves".

6.1.3. Technical Specification Section 5.5.4, "Radioactive Effluent Controls Program".

7. ATTACHMENTS 7.1. Attachment 1 - Containment Release Form 7.2. Attachment 2 - Containment Release Log

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 3 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 1 of 22 1(2) PR 01J Operable ___ X___Yes ________No (refer to RP-BR-932)

Release Number __ G-13-001___

Initiate Purge by Time/Date ___0700/tomorrow _

A. Radiation Protection/Chemistry Responsibility

1. INDICATE the Containment to be released by CHECKING the applicable Unit.

Unit One Containment X Unit Two Containment N/A Release Type Notes Initial Date Routine Release 1,2,3,6,7 RR today First Post-Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Second Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Third Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Additional Non-Continuous Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A Continuous Post Shutdown Release 3,4,5,6,7 N/A N/A NOTE 1: Only one containment release can be performed with each containment noble gas, iodine and tritium analysis, unless otherwise approved by RP/Chemistry Supervision. A release is defined as the exhaust isolation valves being open for greater than one minute.

Leave blank if no approval needed.

SRRS 2C.111

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 4 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 2 of 22 NOTE 2: Routine non-outage analyzed samples are valid for a period of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days 0.0133 hours 7.936508e-5 weeks 1.8264e-5 months from the time the sample is pulled. As long as the purge is initiated in the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days 0.0133 hours 7.936508e-5 weeks 1.8264e-5 months window, the package is valid until the purge is terminated. Under conditions of continuous feed and bleed in modes 1-4, a new sample must be obtained every 24 hours2.777778e-4 days 0.00667 hours 3.968254e-5 weeks 9.132e-6 months and a new release package must be prepared and used within 48 hours5.555556e-4 days 0.0133 hours 7.936508e-5 weeks 1.8264e-5 months from the time each sample is pulled.

NOTE 3: Following a startup, shutdown, or thermal power change of 15% within one hour, new containment samples must be obtained and analyzed prior to a containment purge or vent.

NOTE 4: During refueling or extended outages when containment integrity is broken and the containment purge system is in continuous use, the following special practices will be implemented:

A new containment release form should be completed every 30 hours3.472222e-4 days 0.00833 hours 4.960317e-5 weeks 1.1415e-5 months , not to exceed 48 hours5.555556e-4 days 0.0133 hours 7.936508e-5 weeks 1.8264e-5 months during the first three days of the outage until the noble gas and tritium activity in containment has stabilized at or near LLD.

Once the noble gas and tritium concentrations are verified stabilized by trending for a period of 3 days, the purge can be run continuously without generating a new package.

To initiate a containment release package, with no expiration date, complete steps A.1. through A.6., and mark continuous release in the Initiate Purge by blank on Page 1 If significant increases in daily noble gas or tritium concentrations are noted or the purge is terminated a new containment release package must be initiated.

NOTE 5: In Modes 5, 6 and defueled only, interruptions of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months or less shall not be considered a termination of release.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 5 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 3 of 22 NOTE 6: It is permissible to simultaneously release from multiple sources (i.e., U-1 Containment and Gas Decay Tank) provided that each release path meets its respective release rate limits as documented on the applicable release form.

NOTE 7: All times should be recorded in a 2400 hour0.0278 days 0.667 hours 0.00397 weeks 9.132e-4 months time format.

A. 2. OBTAIN the following and ATTACH to this release form:

a. Containment noble gas activity

b. Containment tritium activity (RP-BR-911 or RP-BR-949)

c. Containment Iodine activity

__ RR _/__ today Initial Date

3. VERIFY that the noble gas activity from 1(2)PB111 has not changed significantly since sampling. (NA this step if 1(2)PB111 is not in service). The 1(2) PB111 trend can be obtained from the 1(2) RM11, or Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_RP0076 (Unit 1) or BRW02V_RP0114 (Unit 2).

__ RR _/_ today Initial Date CAUTION If 0VA02CC/D is in operation without 0VA02CA/B in operation, VA will not provide any flow up the unit 1 stack even with the charcoal booster fans in operation. In this case, a Laboratory Fume Hood exhaust fan (0VL02CA/B) must be in operation to provide air flow.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 6 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 4 of 22

4. a. For a Unit one release VERIFY at least one of the following conditions exists. (Check box next to operating component, NA this step if performing a Unit two release)

Unit one Aux Building Exhaust Fan (0VA02CA or 0VA02CB) running One Lab HVAC Fume Hood Exhaust (0VL02CA or 0VL02CB) running Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA-F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan running (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) with NO main VA fans running (0VA02CA-D).

__ RR __/_ today Initial Date CAUTION If 0VA02CA/B is in operation without 0VA02CC/D in operation, VA will not provide any flow up the unit 2 stack even with the charcoal booster fans in operation. In this case, a Radwaste Exhaust Fan (0VW03CA/B) must be in operation to provide air flow.

A. 4. b. For a Unit two release VERIFY at least one of the following conditions exists. (Check box next to operating component, NA this step if performing a Unit one release)

Unit two Aux Building Exhaust Fan (0VA02CC or 0VA02CD) running One Radwaste Building Exhaust Fan (0VW03CA or 0VW03CB) running Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA-F) and one FHB Charcoal Booster Fan runnning (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) with no main VA fans running (0VA02CA-D).

_______/_______

Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 7 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 5 of 22 NOTE: If no quantifiable noble gas peaks and no tritium are found in the containment radionuclide analysis, or if all identified noble gases and tritium are less than their respective LLD's, enter "<LLD" in steps A.5.a.1 and A.5.a.2 NOTE: If a computerized release program is available, attach the printout to this form. N/A may be used for steps that perform same function as computer when computer is used.

5. Release Rate and Monitor Setpoint Determination

a. VERIFY that the release does not exceed the 10CFR20 release limits by COMPARING the calculated total µCi/cc values to their stated µCi/cc limits in Step A.5.b.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 8 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 6 of 22 A. 5. a. 1) RECORD the total noble gas activity from the applicable isotopic below.

Noble Gas Activity = ______4.44E-4______ uCi/cc

__ RR __/__ today Initial Date

2) RECORD the tritium activity from Section B of RP-BR-911 or RP-BR-949.

Tritium Activity = _______4.1E-6_______ uCi/cc

__ RR __/__ today Initial Date b) 1) Is the NOBLE GAS activity (step A.5.a.1) less than or equal to 5.29E-2 µCi/cc AND the TRITIUM activity (step A.5.a.2) less than or equal to 5.29E-2 µCi/cc?

[ ] YES This package is acceptable for release using the Mini-Purge or Post-Loca flowpaths. (N/A all of step A.5.b.2).

[ ] NO Then answer the following question:

2) Is the NOBLE GAS activity (step A.5.a.1) less than or equal to 5.29E-1 µCi/cc AND the TRITIUM activity (step A.5.a.2) less than or equal to 5.29E-1 µCi/cc?

[ ] YES This package is acceptable for release using the Post-Loca Flowpath only. N/A all of step E.1 now.

[ ] NO THIS PACKAGE MAY BE UNACCEPTABLE FOR RELEASE. Notify Unit Supervisor. Notify Chemistry ODCM/RETS owner for further guidance.

__ RR __/_ today _

Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 9 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 7 of 22 NOTE: The following guidance only applies to the RETDAS computer program:

The release rate calculation should initially be performed assuming a containment purge rate of 4000 cfm (1.89E6 cc/sec). This release rate is associated with the mini purge system.

If a recalculation is required (Step A.5.b.2 is answered yes) the containment purge rate used should be 400 cfm (1.89E5 cc/sec). This release rate is associated with the post-LOCA purge system.

In either case, the total noble gas or tritium release rate must be <=1E5

µCi/sec.

NOTE: If the noble gas activity recorded in Step A.5.a.1. is <LLD, a value of zero should be used for the total containment activity in Step A.5.c.

NOTE: Independent verification of steps A.5.c and A.5.d is required if manual calculations are performed. If a computerized release program is used, attach the printout and "NA" Steps A.5.c. and A.5.ed.

c. The alarm setpoints will be set at a value of 50% above the containment total analyzed noble gas activity plus the current containment purge monitor gas detector [1(2)PB101] background. The current 1(2)PB101 background value can be OBTAINED from the 1(2)RM-11, or Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_RP0066 (Unit 1) or BRW02V_RP0104 (Unit 2).

(Total Containment activity x 1.5) + [1(2)PB101] background =

(________________ µCi/cc x 1.5) + _________________ µCi/cc =

(Step A.5.a.1)

_________________ µCi/cc Indep Verf

__ _____/_ ____ _ _____/______

Initial Date Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 10 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 8 of 22

d. EVALUATE the calculated monitor setpoint as follows:

1) COMPARE the calculated monitor setpoint from Step A.5.c. to the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint of 6.06E-4 µCi/cc. If the calculated value is less than the baseline monitor setpoint, RECORD the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint as the release setpoint. If the calculated value is greater than the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the release setpoint.

1(2)PB101 HIGH Alarm Setpoint __________ µCi/cc

2) COMPARE the calculated monitor setpoint from Step A.5.c. to the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint of 6.06E-5 µCi/cc. If the calculated value is less than the baseline monitor setpoint, RECORD the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint as the release setpoint. If the calculated value is greater than the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the release setpoint.

1(2)PB101 ALERT Alarm Setpoint _________ __ µCi/cc

e. RECORD Release Setpoints:

1(2)PB101 HIGH Alarm Setpoint __6.06E-4___ µCi/cc ALERT Alarm Setpoint __6.06E-5 ____ µCi/cc Indep Verf

__ RR __/ today __ N/A_/______

Initial Date Initial Date NOTE: If any single isotope of iodine is present in the attached isotopic report(s) at greater than 1.0E-8 µCi/cc, then Chemistry ODCM evaluation is required prior to performing this containment release. If Section B of this procedure is N/A, then forward this release package to Operations (as required by Step 4.2 in this procedure) after approval for release at Step A.7.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 11 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 9 of 22 A. 6. REVIEW the attached iodine isotopic report(s) and SELECT one of the following:

o Any single isotope of iodine is present at greater than 1.0 E-8 µCi/cc, Section B must be completed by Chemistry.

_______/______

Initial Date o No single isotope of iodine is present at greater than 1.0E-8 µCi/cc, mark Section B N/A.

_______/______

Initial Date

7. APPROVAL FOR RELEASE Radiation Protection _____ Rad Supervisor________

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 12 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 10 of 22 B. Chemistry Department Responsibility NOTE: If detectable levels of Iodine are present in the attached isotopic report(s), then Chemistry ODCM evaluation is required for Quarterly and Annual Effluent dose limits prior to performing this containment release.

1. The Chemistry ODCM evaluation is complete.

_______/______

Initial Date The following release path is required:

Post-Loca flowpath Release path as outlined in step A.5.b.

Approval for release:

Chemistry ________________________________

_______/______

Initial Date C. Operating Department Responsibility NOTE: If any of the below instruments are inoperable, then refer to RETS 12.2.2.A and Table 12.2-3 for appropriate action.

1. PERFORM the appropriate instrumentation operability checks and required Tech Spec surveillances on applicable monitors.

a. PERFORM _1BwOS RETS 2.2.B-1, Unit 1_Pre-Release Source and Channel Check of Containment Purge Effluent Monitor 1PR01J (1RE-PR001A/B/C).

___ JN _/_ Today Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 13 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 11 of 22

b. RECORD original Setpoint of __RE-PR001 Gas Channel RM-11 Monitor GRID ADDRESS CNMT 2 _1PB101 HIGH ALARM SETPOINT 6.06E-4__µCi/cc PURGE EFF ALERT ALARM SETPOINT _6.06E-5_µCi/cc

__ JN __/_ Today Initial Date NOTE: Steps c-f should be completed only if the setpoints recommended by RP in Step A.5.e. are different than the current setpoints of _RE-PR001 Gas Channel.

NOTE: When the RM-11 is in SUPERVISOR MODE, some actions may have serious detrimental effects on system operation.

Use CAUTION and DO NOT leave the RM-11 console unattended when it is in the SUPERVISOR MODE. If any unusual conditions occur then contact the system STE.

c. PLACE the RM-11 console in SUPERVISOR MODE.

_______/_______

Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 14 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 12 of 22

d. DEPRESS the CHANNEL ITEM Key. Then SELECT the High Alarm Setpoint Channel Item by KEYING in "09" and then DEPRESSING the SEL key.

Grid 2 ____PB101

_______/______

Initial Date

e. ENTER the High Alarm Setpoint for _PB101 suggested by Radiation Protection/Chemistry in section A.5.e. using the format XYZ + AB. (i.e. A value of 5.36E-12 would be entered as 536-12).

High Alarm Release Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/______ _______/______

Initial Date Initial Date

f. ENTER the Alert Alarm Setpoint suggested by Radiation Protection/Chemistry in Section A.5.e. using the method described in steps d and e. In order to select the Alert Alarm Channel Item in step d, a "10" must be KEYED in.

High Alarm Release Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/______ _______/______

Initial Date Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 15 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 13 of 22 D. SHIFT ENGINEER OR SRO RESPONSIBILITY

1. PLACE the placard "Gaseous Release in Progress" somewhere on 0PM02J where the placard will be visible. This is to ensure that for a unit 1 release an Aux. Bldg. Exhaust Fan (unit 1 side) or a Lab HVAC exhaust fan is in operation, OR for a unit 2 release an Aux. Bldg. Exhaust Fan (unit 2 side) or a Radwaste Bldg. Exhaust Fan is in operation, or for either unit , to have (2) Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA-F) and (1) FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) in operation.

_ US___/_ today Initial Date NOTE: Routine non-outage analyzed samples are valid for a period of 48 hours5.555556e-4 days 0.0133 hours 7.936508e-5 weeks 1.8264e-5 months . As long as the purge is initiated in the 48 hour5.555556e-4 days 0.0133 hours 7.936508e-5 weeks 1.8264e-5 months window, the package is valid until the purge is terminated NOTE: Following a startup, shutdown, or thermal power change of 15% within one hour, new containment samples must be obtained and analyzed prior to a containment purge or vent.

2. ENSURE sections A.7. and B.1 are signed or labeled not applicable by a member of Radiation Protection and/or Chemistry approving the release.

ENSURE the sample analyses have not expired from page 1.

__ US__/_ today Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 16 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 14 of 22

3. If the release is from Containment through the Mini Purge System, then INSTRUCT the operator to start the Mini Purge System per BwOP VQ-6 Containment Mini-Purge Operation (The fan start section), following SE or SRO approval in Step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in Step A.5.b. for Mini-Purge flowpath, and per Chemistry approval in Step B.1 (if required).

If the release is from Containment through the Mini Purge System for the purpose of equalizing Containment pressure with atmospheric pressure (no fans required), then INSTRUCT the Operator to perform procedure BwOP VQ-6, Containment Mini-Purge Operation (The venting containment section), following SE or SRO approval in Step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in Step A.5.b. for mini purge flowpath, and per Chemistry approval in Step B.1 (if required).

If the release is from Containment through the Post-LOCA Purge System, INSTRUCT the operator to PERFORM procedure BwOP VQ-7 following SE or SRO approval in step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in step A.5.b. for Post-LOCA flowpath, or per Chemistry direction in Step B.1.

D. 4. REVIEW information and ENSURE the form is filled out properly.

Approval for Release _______ US ________/__ today SE OR SRO Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 17 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 15 of 22 E. Operator Responsibility

1. If the release is through the Containment Mini Purge System, then COMPLETE the following:

OPERATOR SRO

a. Affected Containment ____ ______/______ ______/______

b. RECORD affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in effect.

______/______

d. Start time of purge ____ ______/______

Exhaust isolation dampers open per BwOP VQ-6 OR Time of transfer from Release # _________________________

e. Start time of fan ____ ______/______

f. Purge flowrate _FI-VQ009 ____cfm ______/______

(or estimate if flow gauge is inoperable)

g. Stop time of fan ____ ______/______

h. Stop time of purge ____ ______/______

Exhaust isolation dampers closed per BwOP VQ-6 or Time of transfer to Release #___________________________

i. Final affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

NOTE: In Modes 5, 6 and defueled only, momentary interruptions of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months or less shall not be considered a termination of release.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 18 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 16 of 22 E. 1. j. Purge interruptions of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months or less Stop time Start time

____ ____ ______/______

E. 2. If the release is through the Containment Mini Purge System as a VENT PATH (without a fan in operation), then COMPLETE the following:

OPERATOR SRO

a. Affected Containment ____ ______/______ ______/______

Unit.

b. RECORD affected Containment ____psig ______/______

Positive Pressure

c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in affect.

______/______

d. Start time of release (Exhaust isolation valves open per BwOP VQ-6) ____ ______/______

e. Stop time of release (Exhaust Isolation valves closed per BwOP VQ-6) ____ ______/______

f. Final affected Containment Pressure ____psig ______/______

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 19 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 17 of 22 E. 3. If the release is through the CNMT Post LOCA Purge System, then COMPLETE the following:

OPERATOR SRO

a. Affected Containment ____ ______/______ ______/______

b. RECORD affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in affect.

______/______

d. Start time of purge ____ ______/______

Exhaust isolation dampers open per BwOP VQ-7 or Time of transfer from Release # _________________________

e. Start time of fan ____ ______/______

f. Purge flowrate _FI-VQ093 ____cfm ______/______

(or estimate if flow gauge is inoperable)

g. Stop time of fan ____ ______/______

h. Stop time of purge ____ ______/______

Exhaust isolation dampers closed per BwOP VQ-7 or Time of transfer to Release #___________________________

i. Final affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

j. Purge interruptions of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months or less Stop time Start time

____ ____ ______/______

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 20 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 18 of 22 NOTE: If this release will be continued on another release package (unit is in a continuous release mode) step E.4 and E.5 can be skipped.

E. 4. RETURN Rad Monitors for the affected release path to their baseline setpoints (This Step is NOT APPLICABLE if setpoints were not changed in step C.1.)

a. Containment Release ( RE-PR001)

1) RETURN the HIGH ALARM Setpoint for PB101 to the baseline setpoint in Section A.5.e. (USE the method described in Section C.1.)

High Alarm Baseline Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/________ _______/________

Initial Date Initial Date

2) RETURN the Alert Alarm Setpoint for PB101 to the baseline Setpoint in section A.5.e. (USE the method described in Section C.1.).

Alert Alarm Baseline Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/________ _______/________

Initial Date Initial Date

5. REMOVE the placard "Gaseous Release in Progress" from 0PM02J.

6 RETURN this release form to the SE or SRO.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 21 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 19 of 22 F. SE or SRO Responsibility NOTE: Notify Radiation Protection/Chemistry that the release has been terminated if containment purge will be discontinued for more than 4 hours4.62963e-5 days 0.00111 hours 6.613757e-6 weeks 1.522e-6 months AND containment integrity is broken.

1. REVIEW the discharge data and ENSURE that the form is filled out properly.

Discharge complete; reviewed by _________/______/_____

SE or SRO Date Time

2. FORWARD this form to Chemistry Supervision.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 22 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 20 of 22 G. Chemistry Responsibility

1. Actual Gaseous and TRITIUM Activity Released NOTE: If a computerized release program is available, attach the printout to this form and indicate "see attached" in the calculation spaces below. If manual calculations are performed, independent verification is required.

NOTE: More than one method may be used to quantify a release if the time the isolation dampers were opened differs from the time the fans were turned on or separate calculations of the same method may be performed. For example two different release paths were used with different flow rates.

a. Differential Pressure Method - to be used when containment integrity is not broken.

1) Volume of containment released Pi Pf 7.82 E + 10 (cc in containment ) x =

cc Pi + 14.7 Where:

P i = pressure before release _____psig P f = pressure after release _____psig

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 23 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 21 of 22 G. 1. a. 2) DOCUMENT in the table below the total µCi released of each noble gas isotope and tritium.

NOTE: µCi released = Analyzed noble gas or tritium activity

(µCi/cc) x volume of containment released (cc).

Noble Gas and Tritium Isotope µCi Released Indep Verf

_______/______ _______/______

Initial Date Initial Date

b. Activity x Flowrate x Time method - to be used when containment integrity is broken (i.e. outages) and no difference in pressure can be noted.

Fill in the chart MULTIPLYING the first 4 columns to OBTAIN activity released in µCi. DIVIDE the activity by the duration of release (seconds) to OBTAIN µCi/sec.

NUCLIDE CONTAINMENT FAN FLOW CONSTANT TIME ACTIVITY RATE

(µCi/cc) (cfm) (cc/cf) (min) (µCi) (µCi/s)

H-3 2.83E+004 Ar-41 2.83E+004 Kr-85 2.83E+004 Kr-85M 2.83E+004 Kr-87 2.83E+004 Kr-88 2.83E+004 Xe-131M 2.83E+004 Xe-133 2.83E+004 Xe-133M 2.83E+004 Xe-135 2.83E+004 TOTALS Indep Verf

_______/______ _______/______

Initial Date Initial Date

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 24 of 25 ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form Page 22 of 22 G. 1. c. Concentration Curve Fit Method - if a high fan flow or high concentration was used during the release and sufficient containment atmosphere samples are available the rate change of concentration in containment may be used for a more accurate determination of released activity.

REFER to policy Memo EFF-06 and ATTACH pertinent calculations to this form.

2. VERIFY compliance with 10CFR50 dose limits by ENTERING release data into the 10CFR50 ODCM gaseous release program per CY-AA-170-200, Radioactive Effluent Controls Program.

RP-BR-980 Revision 12 Page 25 of 25 ATTACHMENT 2 Containment Release Log Page 1 of 1 Date Release Release Date Release Release Pkg. Made Number Source Pkg. Made Number Source Records Retention: SRRS 2C.111

RETDAS v3.6.3 <BRA> VSSI GASEOUS PRE-RELEASE PERMIT REPORT Permit Number: 2006100 Release Point: Unit 1 Containment Purge Release Mode : 2 Batch Permit Status : Pre-Release Comments:

RELEASE DATA ================================================

Release Number .......................................... G-13-001 1(2) PB101 High Alarm Setpoint (uCi/cc)................... 6.06E-04 Alert Alarm Setpoint (uCi/cc)................... 6.06E-05

MONITOR DATA ================================================

1(2) PB101 Monitor Background(uCi/cc)...................... 1.82E-06 Calculated Setpoint (uCi/cc).............................. 7.23E-06

RELEASE RATE DATA ===========================================

Procedure: BwRP 6110-13T1 Section: A.5.b.1........... YES This package is acceptable for release using the Main Purge, Mini-Purge, Vent Path or Post-LOCA flowpaths.

Discharge flowrate (cfm)................................... 4.39E+04 Discharge flowrate (cc/sec)................................ 2.07E+07 NG Release Rate (uCi/sec).................................. 7.48E+01 Percent of Release Rate Limit (%).......................... 7.48E-02 H-3 Release Rate (uCi/sec)................................. 8.50E+01 Percent of Release Rate Limit (%).......................... 8.50E-02

LIMITS ANALYSIS =============================================

Performed by:_____R. P. Tech____________________ Date: _Today_____

RETDAS v3.6.3 <BRA> VSSI GASEOUS PRE-RELEASE PERMIT REPORT Permit Number: 2006100

=== NUCLIDE DATA

===========================================

Undiluted Rel Rate Nuclide uCi/cc uCi/sec XE-133 4.89E-05 7.48E+03 F&AG 5.09E-05 7.48+03 H-3 1.82E-06 8.50E+01 H-3 1.82E-06 8.50E+01 Total 5.27E-05 1.60E+02

RP-BR-911 Revision 6 Page 14 of 14 ATTACHMENT 8 1/2RE-PR011J ATMOSPHERIC TRITIUM CALCULATION FORM Page 1 of 1 A. Sample Information Sample Location:_____1PR11J________ RT:________WH____________

Date On: _____today__________ Date Off: _______ today __________

Time On: _______0100________ Time Off: ________0215__________

B. Tritium Concentration Calculation

___4.10E-4____Ci/ml (150 ml)

( 200cc/min) ( 75_ min)

Tritium Concentration = ___4.1E-6_____Ci/cc C. Derived Air Concentration Calculation Tritium Concentration 2 E-5 Ci/cc/DAC DAC Fraction = ___2.05E-1______

Reviewed By: _____Rad Pro Sup________/___today___

Radiation Protection/Chemistry Date

ML13169A426

Contents

Text

REFERENCES:

Title:

REFERENCES:

Title:

REFERENCES:

REFERENCES:

SUMMARY

REFERENCES:

SUMMARY

SUMMARY

REFERENCES:

REFERENCES:

REFERENCES:

RELEASE DATA ================================================

MONITOR DATA ================================================

RELEASE RATE DATA ===========================================

LIMITS ANALYSIS =============================================

===========================================

Navigation menu

ML13169A426

Text

REFERENCES:

Title:

REFERENCES:

Title:

REFERENCES:

REFERENCES:

SUMMARY

REFERENCES:

SUMMARY

SUMMARY

REFERENCES:

REFERENCES:

REFERENCES:

RELEASE DATA ================================================

MONITOR DATA ================================================

RELEASE RATE DATA ===========================================

LIMITS ANALYSIS =============================================

===========================================

Navigation menu

Search